Nablus Municipality
Ministry of Social Affairs
State of Palestine
India, Brazil, and South
Africa Forum
Nablus Center for Rehabilitation
Phase I
Technical Specifications
Part B - Electrical Works
July 2013
NABLUS MUNICIPALITY
Construction, Completion and Maintenance of
Nablus Center For Intelectual Disbility
Phase I & II
PART B – Electrical Works
VOLUME II
May, 2013
SECTION E010
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section, Electrical General Provisions applies to all sections of electrical divisions.
B. Furnish and install electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance with the
specifications and drawings. Capacities and ratings of motors, transformers, cable, switchboards,
switchgear, panelboards, motor control centers, and other items and arrangements for the
specified items are shown on drawings.
C. Electrical service entrance equipment (arrangements for temporary and permanent connections
to the power company's system) shall conform to the power company's requirements. Coordinate
fuses, circuit breakers and relays with the power company's system, and obtain power company
approval for sizes and settings of these devices.
D. Wiring capacities specified or shown on the drawings are based on copper conductors, with the
conduit and raceways accordingly sized. Aluminum conductors are prohibited.
1.02 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards of the following organizations are minimum installation requirement standards
1.
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC).
2.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
4.
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
5.
National Electrical Code (NEC).
6.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
7.
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
8.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
9.
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
10.
British Code (BS)
B. Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those instances where requirements are
greater than those specified in the above standards.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This division of the specifications covers the electrical systems of the project. It includes work
performed by the electrical trades as well as trades not normally considered as electrical trades.
B. Provide all incidentals, equipment, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools,
supervision, labor consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., necessary to provide complete systems.
Perform start-up and checkout on each item and system to provide fully operable systems.
C. Examine and compare the Electrical Drawings with these specifications, and report any
discrepancies between them to the Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written instructions for
changes necessary in the work. At time of bid the most stringent requirements must be included
in the bid.
D. Examine and compare the Electrical Drawings and Specifications with the Drawings and
Specifications of other trades, and report any discrepancies between them to the
Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written instructions for changes necessary in the work. At
time of bid, the most stringent requirements must be included in said bid.
E. Install and coordinate the electrical work in cooperation with other trades installing interrelated
work. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences in a manner approved by
the Architect/Engineer. All changes required in the work of the Contractor, caused by his neglect
to do so, shall be made by him at his own expense.
E010-1
F. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete workable system ready for
the Owner's operation. Any item not specifically shown on the Drawings or called for in the
Specifications, but normally required to conform to the intent, are to be considered a part of the
Contract.
G. All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be new and unused (temporary lighting and power
products are excluded) and free from defects. All materials used shall bear the Underwriter's
Laboratory, Inc. label provided a standard has been established for the material in question.
1.04 TEST STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., standards where test standards have been
established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by UL Standards will be accepted
provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet
safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no
nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe,
will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as
NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definitive shop
drawings.
B. Definitions:
1. Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned which:
a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of
production of such equipment.
b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested
and found safe for use in a specified manner.
2. Labeled; equipment or device is when:
a. It embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized
testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
b. The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment.
c. The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to
determine safe use in a specified manner.
3. Certified; equipment or product is which:
a. Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet nationally
recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner.
b. Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory.
c. Bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of
the manufacturer's principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and
shall have manufactured the item for at least three years.
B. Product Qualification:
1. Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operation, on three installations of
similar size and type as this project, for approximately three years.
2. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a list of installations
where the products have been in operation before approval.
1.06 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts shall be available.
B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the
product of a single manufacturer.
C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:
1. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.
E010-2
2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall
assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended
service.
4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.
1.07 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Where variations from the contract requirements are requested, the connecting work and related
components shall include, but not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit
protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and installation methods.
1.08 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
A. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical
damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain:
1. During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, and
other like items, shall be protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned
both inside and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.
2. Damaged equipment shall be, as determined by the Resident Engineer, placed in first class
operating condition or be returned to the source of supply for repair or replacement.
3. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy Kraft paper, sheet
vinyl or equal.
4. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be refinished with the same quality of paint
and workmanship as used by the manufacturer so repaired areas are not obvious.
1.09 WORK PERFORMANCE
A. All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 70B, and NFPA
70E, in addition to other references required by contract.
B. Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of the contractor.
C. Electrical work shall be accomplished with all affected circuits or equipment de-energized. When
an electrical outage cannot be accomplished in this manner for the required work, the following
requirements are mandatory:
1. Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and tested insulating material to
cover exposed energized electrical components, certified and tested insulated tools, etc.)
while working on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 70E.
2. Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on energized systems in
accordance with NFPA 70E.
3. Before initiating any work, a job specific work plan must be developed by the contractor with a
peer review conducted and documented by the Resident Engineer. The work plan must
include procedures to be used on and near the live electrical equipment, barriers to be
installed, and safety equipment to be used and exit pathways.
D. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to minimize interferences.
1.10 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment location shall be as close as practical to locations shown on the drawings.
B. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all voltages specified.
C. Inaccessible Equipment:
1. Where Resident Engineer determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not
conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, the equipment shall be removed and
reinstalled as directed at no additional cost.
2. "Conveniently accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of
ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as, but not limited to,
motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.
E010-3
1.11 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to the requirements of the NEC, install an identification sign which clearly indicates
information required for use and maintenance of items such as panel boards, cabinets, motor
controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, individual breakers
and controllers in switchboards, switchgear and motor control assemblies, control devices and
other significant equipment.
B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a
minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inch) high. Secure nameplates with screws. Nameplates that are furnished
by manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein
specified, are exceptions.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with section 2.03 SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS.
B. The Owner's representative approval shall be obtained for all equipment and material before
delivery to the job site. Delivery, storage or installation of equipment or material which has not had
prior approval will not be permitted at the job site.
C. All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cuts, shop drawings and other
data necessary for the Owner's representative to ascertain that the proposed equipment and
materials comply with specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall be
legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.
D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist of more than one item
or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be
considered for approval.
1. Mark the submittals, "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION__________________".
2. Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including the section and
paragraph numbers.
3. Submit each section separately.
E. The submittals shall include the following:
1. Information that confirms compliance with contract requirements. Include the manufacturer's
name, model or catalog numbers, catalog information, technical data sheets, shop drawings,
pictures, nameplate data and test reports as required.
2. Elementary and interconnection wiring diagrams for communication and signal systems,
control system and equipment assemblies. All terminal points and wiring shall be identified on
wiring diagrams.
3. Parts list which shall include those replacement parts recommended by the equipment
manufacturer, quantity of parts, current price and availability of each part.
F. Manuals:
1. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: Submit as required for systems and equipment
specified in the technical sections. Furnish four copies, bound in hardback binders,
(manufacturer's standard binders) or an approved equivalent. Furnish one complete manual
as specified in the technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of systems
or equipment test, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to contract completion.
2. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words "MAINTENANCE AND
OPERATION MANUAL," the name and location of the system, equipment, building, name of
Contractor, and contract number. Include in the manual the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local
representatives for the system or equipment.
3. Provide a "Table of Contents" and assemble the manual to conform to the table of contents,
with tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be
legible and easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in.
4. The manuals shall include:
a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed
operation and control of the equipment.
b. A control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
c. Description of the function of each principal item of equipment.
E010-4
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Installation and maintenance instructions.
Safety precautions.
Diagrams and illustrations.
Testing methods.
Performance data.
Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency.
Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part numbers. Emphasis shall be placed on the use of
special tools and instruments. The list shall indicate sources of supply, recommended
spare parts, and name of servicing organization.
k. Appendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for support of the equipment,
including addresses and certified qualifications.
G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with shop drawings.
H. After approval and prior to installation, furnish the Resident Engineer with one sample of each of
the following:
1. A 300 mm (12 inch) length of each type and size of wire and cable along with the tag from the
coils of reels from which the samples were taken.
2. Each type of conduit coupling, bushing and termination fitting.
3. Conduit hangers, clamps and supports.
4. Duct sealing compound.
5. Each type of receptacle, toggle switch, outlet box, manual motor starter, device plate,
engraved nameplate, wire and cable splicing and terminating material and single pole molded
case circuit breaker.
6. Each type of light fixture specified in Section E510 or shown on the drawings.
1.13 SINGULAR NUMBER
Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these specifications in the singular
number (e.g., "the switch"), this reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as
are required to complete the installation as shown on the drawings.
1.14 TRAINING
A. Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as required in each associated
specification.
B. A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by the contractor and approved by the
Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the planned training.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Applicable equipment and materials shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and
Manufactured in accordance with ASME, NEMA, ANSI or IEEE standards, and as approved by
local authorities having jurisdiction as mentioned in Division 1.
B. If products and materials are specified or indicated on the Drawings for a specific item or system,
use those products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in either of the above,
use first class products and materials, subject to approval of Shop Drawings where Shop
Drawings are required or as approved in writing where Shop Drawings are not required.
2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT
A. All requests for substitution of materials or equipment shall be made in writing by the Contractor.
The request must be in the Engineers office not less than 10 days prior to the bid date. Samples
of proposed substitute materials or equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for review
whenever they are requested. Bids shall be based only upon the specified materials and
equipment, or substitutes that have received written acceptance from the Engineer prior to the bid.
B. Wherever the words "for approval" or "approved" are used in regard to manufactured specialties,
or wherever it is desired to substitute a different make or type of apparatus for that specified,
submit all information pertinent to the adequacy and adaptability of the proposed apparatus, and
secure Architect/Engineer's acceptance before apparatus is ordered.
E010-5
C. Wherever quantities or a definite make and size of apparatus are specified, the make and size of
apparatus which is proposed must conform substantially (in regard to the operating results) to that
specified or implied. Same shall apply to important dimensions relating to operation of apparatus
in coordination with the rest of the system, or to properly fitting it into available space conditions.
Any substitution of equipment or apparatus shall include all necessary revisions, as required to
complete the installation.
D. Acceptance of substitutions, for equipment specified herein, will not be given merely upon
submission of manufacturer's names and will be given only after receipt of complete and
satisfactory performance data covering the complete range of operating conditions in tabular and
graphical form. Furnish complete and satisfactory information relative to equipment dimensions,
weight, etc. Acceptance of all equipment specified or shown on the Drawings, or substitutions
submitted for that specified or shown on the Drawings, will be granted if such equipment, in the
opinion of the Architect/Engineer, conforms to the performance requirements, space conditions,
weight requirements and quality requirements. Any additional construction and design costs
incurred as a result of any accepted substitution shall be borne by the Contractor. The opinion
and judgment of the Architect/Engineer shall be final, conclusive, and binding.
2.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prepare and submit detailed Shop Drawings for materials, systems, and equipment as listed
herein, including locations and sizes of all openings in floor decks, walls, and floors.
B. The Work described in any Shop Drawing submission shall be carefully checked for all clearances
(including those required for maintenance and servicing), field conditions, maintenance of
architectural conditions, and proper coordination with all trades on the job. Each submitted Shop
Drawing shall include a certification that all related job conditions have been checked and that no
conflict exists.
C. All drawings shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of field requirements to allow ample time
for checking and resubmittal as may be required. All submittals shall be complete and contain all
required and detailed information.
D. Acceptance of any submitted data or Shop Drawings for material, equipment apparatus, devices,
arrangements, and layout shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility of furnishing same of
proper dimensions and weight, capacities, sizes, quantity, quality and installation details, to
efficiently perform the requirements and intent of the Contract. Such acceptance shall not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or inadequacies of any sort on submitted data
or Shop Drawings.
E. Each Shop Drawing shall contain the following information:
1. Provide general information on each copy of the submittal.
a.
Project title.
b.
Reference to the applicable drawing and specification article.
c.
Contractor and supplier identification, addresses and telephone numbers.
d.
Submittal Date.
2. Certification that the contractor has reviewed the submittal.
3. Refer to individual specification sections for additional information requirements.
F. Shop drawing submittals shall be provided for each specific material, system, or equipment as
identified herein.
1. As a minimum, make submittals on the following items:
a.
Raceways, conduit & wire
b.
Wiring devices and plates
c.
Switchboards
d.
Transformers
e.
Panel boards
f.
Fuses
g.
Disconnect switches
h.
Motor control centers
i.
Motor controllers, starters, and contactors
j.
Lighting fixtures, lamps
k.
Instrumentation, metering equipment
E010-6
l.
Special systems - fire alarm, security, CCTV, intercom, etc.
2. Refer to individual specification sections for additional submittal requirements.
---END---
E010-7
SECTION E020
ELECTRICAL SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section pertains to making arrangements for electrical services.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with all service installation standards of the serving utility.
PART 2 - ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
2.01 SOURCE
A. Electrical service will be provided from local power company system. The source characteristics
are 400/230 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, and 50 hertz.
2.02 COORDINATION
A. The location of the service entrance, floor trenches, transformers and switchgear pads must be
coordinated with the local power company. Provide materials and equipment required to connect
the project service to the utility system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install the utility services as required by local power company and the contract documents.
Demonstrate that the electrical system is operational.
---END---
E020-1
SECTION E110
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of conduit, fittings, and boxes to
form complete, coordinated, grounded raceway systems. Raceways are required for all wiring
unless shown or specified otherwise.
B. Definitions: The term conduit, as used in these specifications, shall mean any or all of the raceway
types specified.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
In accordance with section E010 (SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS), furnish the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Size and location of main feeders.
2. Size and location of panels and pull boxes.
3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.
4. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog cuts.
B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer four copies of the
certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been
properly installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Conduit Size: not less than 20 mm (3/4 inch) unless otherwise shown.
B. Conduit:
1. Rigid galvanized steel: Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.
2. Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A, ANSI C80.5.
3. Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 1242, ANSI C80.6.
4. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 797, ANSI C80.3. Maximum size not to
exceed 105 mm (4 inch) and shall be permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.
5. Flexible galvanized steel conduit: Shall Conform to UL 1.
6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit: Shall Conform to UL 360.
7. Direct burial plastic conduit: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651A, heavy wall PVC or high
density polyethylene (PE).
8. Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5.
C. Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid steel and IMC conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only steel or malleable
iron materials are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.
c. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.
d. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked into
the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are
not permitted.
e. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete are
permitted for use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. Use set
screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in conduit wall
for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.
E110-1
f.
Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings to
prevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, install fittings in flush steel boxes with
blank cover plates having the same finishes as that of other electrical plates in the room.
2. Electrical metallic tubing fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Couplings and connectors: Concrete tight and rain tight, with connectors having insulated
throats. Use gland and ring compression type couplings and connectors for conduit sizes
50 mm (2 inches) and smaller. Use set screw type couplings with four set screws each for
conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set screws of case-hardened steel with hex
head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.
d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibited.
e. Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fittings made of "pot metal" are prohibited.
3. Flexible steel conduit fittings:
a. Conform to UL 514B. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
b. Clamp type, with insulated throat.
4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA FB1.
b. Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptable.
c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding cone, a steel or plastic compression ring,
and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated throats.
5. Direct burial plastic conduit fittings:
a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC3.
b. As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
6. Surface metal raceway fittings: As recommended by the raceway manufacturer.
7. Expansion and deflection couplings:
a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B.
b. Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction,
and allow 30 degree angular deflections.
c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault
currents in accordance with UL 467, and the NEC code tables for ground conductors.
d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded
rubber material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
D. Conduit Supports:
1. Parts and hardware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion protection.
2. Individual Conduit Hangers: Designed for the purpose, having a pre-assembled closure bolt
and nut, and provisions for receiving a hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers: Not less than 38 mm by 38 mm (1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12
gage steel, cold formed, lipped channels; with not less than 9 mm (3/8 inch) diameter steel
hanger rods.
4. Solid Masonry and Concrete Anchors: Self-drilling expansion shields, or machine bolt
expansion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PENETRATIONS
A. Cutting or Holes:
1. Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the structural sections such as ribs or
beams. Obtain the approval of the Resident Engineer prior to drilling through structural
sections.
2. Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures with a diamond core
drill or concrete saw. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills
are not allowed, except where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited
working space.
E110-2
B. Fire Stop: Where conduits, wire ways, and other electrical raceways pass through fire partitions,
fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against
the spread of fire, smoke and gases as specified in Section, FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS, with
rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant only. Completely fill and seal clearances between
raceways and openings with the fire stop material.
C. Waterproofing: At floor, exterior wall, and roof conduit penetrations, completely seal clearances
around the conduit and make watertight.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install conduit as follows:
1. In complete runs before pulling in cables or wires.
2. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit is not permitted. Remove and replace the damaged
conduits with new undamaged material.
3. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room, walkways, or
doorways.
4. Cut square with a hacksaw, ream, remove burrs, and draw up tight.
5. Mechanically and electrically continuous.
6. Independently support conduit at 8’.0” on center. Do not use other supports i.e., (suspended
ceilings, suspended ceiling supporting members, lighting fixtures, conduits, mechanical
piping, or mechanical ducts).
7. Support within 300 mm of changes of direction, and within 300 mm of each enclosure to
which connected.
8. Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage to prevent entry of
debris, until wires are pulled in.
9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.
10. Secure conduits to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet boxes with bonding type
locknuts.
11. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein, all conduits shall be installed
concealed within finished walls, floors and ceilings.
3.03 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION
1. Conduit: pliable PVC conduit flammable resistance type
2. Align and run conduit in direct lines.
3. Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following occurs:
a. Where shown on the structural drawings.
b. As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to construction, and after submittal of
drawing showing location, size, and position of each penetration.
4. Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm thick is prohibited.
a. Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness is prohibited.
b. Space between conduits in slabs: Approximately six conduit diameters apart, except one
conduit diameter at conduit crossings.
c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that there will be a minimum of
19 mm (3/4 inch) of concrete around the conduits.
3.04 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, exposed conduit is only permitted in mechanical and
electrical rooms.
B. Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and below:
1. Rigid steel, IMC, rigid aluminum, or EMT. Different type of conduits mixed indiscriminately in
the system is prohibited.
C. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.
D. Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with conduit straps.
E110-3
E. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foot) intervals.
F. Surface metal raceways: Use only where shown.
3.09 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Conduits 75 mm (3 inches) and larger, that are secured to the building structure on opposite sides
of a building expansion joint, require expansion and deflection couplings. Install the couplings in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 inches) with junction boxes on both sides of the
expansion joint. Connect conduits to junction boxes with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to
produce 125 mm (5 inch) vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a
copper green ground bonding jumper installed. In lieu of this flexible conduit, expansion and
deflection couplings as specified above for 375 mm (15 inches) and larger conduits are
acceptable.
3.10 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, INSTALLATION
A. Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening devices.
B. Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual conduits. Maximum
distance between supports is 2.5 m (8 foot) on center.
C. Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze hangers. Use trapeze hangers that are designed to
support a load equal to or greater than the sum of the weights of the conduits, wires, hanger itself,
and 90 kg. Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.
D. Support conduit independently of junction boxes, pull boxes, fixtures, suspended ceiling T-bars,
angle supports, and similar items.
E. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.
F. Metal Structures: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices specifically designed and
approved for the application.
G. Attachment by wood plugs, rawl plug, plastic, lead or soft metal anchors, or wood blocking and
bolts supported only by plaster is prohibited.
HChain, wire, or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.
3.11 BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:
1. Flush mounted.
2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.
B. In addition to boxes shown, install additional boxes where needed to prevent damage to cables
and wires during pulling in operations.
C. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for cast
metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are prohibited. A minimum 600 mm , centerto-center lateral spacing shall be maintained between boxes.)
E. Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles is 100 mm square by
55 mm deep, with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.
F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified on riser diagrams; for
example "SIG-FA JB No. 1".
G. On all Branch Circuit junction box covers, identify the circuits with black marker.
---END---
E110-4
SECTION E115
CABLE TRAY
PART -1 GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract.
1.02
SUMMARY
A. Perforated hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication steel cable tray.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
In accordance with Section E010, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS, furnish the following:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Size and location of main feeders;
2. Size and location of panels and pull boxes
3. Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural elements.
4. The specific item proposed and its area of application shall be identified on the catalog
cuts.
B. Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident Engineer two copies of the
certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has
been properly installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
CABLE TRAY
A.
Cable tray shall be of the perforated type with return flanges for added rigidly and
shall be manufactured from hot dip galvanized sheet steel. Minimum metal
thickness shall be as follows:1. 1.2 mm for cable tray up to 200 mm wide.
2. 1.5 mm for cable tray above 200 mm wide.
B.
Each length of cable tray shall be provided with heavy duty galvanized steel joint
pieces and joint cover plates.
C.
Vertical runs of cable tray in electrical switch rooms and shafts shall be provided
with clip-on type galvanized sheet covers.
D.
Provide cable tray complete with all necessary bends. Tees crosses and risers
manufactured from hot dip galvanized sheet steel and manufactured by the same
factory.
E.
All exposed cable trays shall be covered.
TRAY SUPPORTS
A. As recommended by the cable tray manufactured and indicated on the plans.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
CO-ORDINATION
A.
Co-ordinate layout of cable tray with other services to ensure that there is no
conflict.
E115-1
B.
3.02
Relocate cable tray as necessary to avoid building obstruction of other services.
Installation
A.
Install cable tray level and plumb according to manufacturer’s written instructions,
coordination drawings, original design and referenced standards.
B.
Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
C.
Fasten cable tray supports securely to building structure.
D.
Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable tray and to
equipment. Support cable tray independently of fittings. Do not carry weight of
cable tray on equipment enclosure.
E.
Install expansion connectors where cable tray across a building expansion joint
and in cable trays runs that exceed 30 meter space connectors and set gaps as
required.
F.
Make changes in direction and elevation standard fittings.
G.
Make cable tray connections using standard fittings.
H.
Install cable
I.
Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to “Firestopping”
Section.
J.
Install cable trays with sufficient space to permit access for installing cables.
3.03
CABLE TRAYS
A. On completion of cable tray installation, including fittings, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes, including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.04
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and installer, which ensure cable tray is without damage or deterioration
at the time of Substantial Completion.
a. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
cable tray manufacturer.
b. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
3.05
GROUNDING
A.
Provide a separate ground wire on all runs of cable tray bonded to the appropriate
switch gear, cabinets, electrical equipment in accordance with the grounding
specification section.
B.
Provide 10 sq. mm copper bonding jumpers across all joints.
C.
Test complete system for ground continuity.
- - - END - - -
E115-2
SECTION E120
WIRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Single core and multicore 600 volt `wiring, 10mm2 and smaller.
B.
Fixture Wiring
C.
Signaling Systems Wiring
D.
Power Distribution wiring
1.02
REFERENCE STANTARDS
A.
IEC
227
B.
IEC
228
C.
IEC
502, 540
D.
IEC
287
E.
BS 6004, 6231, 6346, 7629.
1.03
SUBMITALS
A.
Submit product data and manufacturers literature
C.
Submit proposals for color coding of insulation
D.
Submit completed test sheets.
E.
Sample of cable pulling lubricant.
Part 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Building Wiring: Concentric lay, uncoated copper with a normal maximum operating
temperature of 85 C, 600V, PVC insulation.
B.
Power and Control wiring: Concentric lay, uncoated copper with a normal maximum
operating temperature of 70 C. Insulation to be 600 V PVC with black PVC jacket. Provide
white conductor insulation with indelible black numerals at 25mm intervals on control cables.
C.
Flame Retardant Power and control Wiring: Multi Strand, concentric lay, coated copper with
a normal maximum operating temperature of 90 C and 600V flame retardant cross linked
polyethylene insulation and overall cable jackets of cholorsulfonated polyethylene, all in
accordance with Standards and Codes. Cable jacket to be applied over tape wrapped cable
cores.
D.
Flame Retardant Alarm and instrument Cable: Multi strand, concentric lay, coated copper
with a normal maximum operating temperature of 90 C and 600V flame retardant cross
linked polyethylene insulation, cable assembly shield of combination aluminum/ mylar tape
and 7 strand 0.6 mm² minimum coated copper drain wire applied to achieve 100% cover
over insulated conductors and chlorosulfonated polyethylene cable jacket. Twisted pair
cables with 60 mm to 90 mm lay staggered. Each pair to be numbered.
E.
Fixture Wire: Standard round coated copper with an operating temperature of 200 C with
600V silicone rubber insulated and braided glass jacket, all in accordance with Standards
and Codes.
F.
Fire alarm Signal Cable: shall be fire resistant multi-core cable to conform with civil defense
regulations and manufacturer recommendations.
G.
Lighting/Power Cable: Multicore copper conductors 600V grade PVC insulation lighting cable
minimum size is 1.5 mm² and power cable minimum size is 2.5 mm². Provide one (1) larger
size lighting/power cable (lighting cable size is 2.5mm2 and power cable size is 4mm²) if
entire circuit length from Electrical panel board to the last lighting fixture/outlet is more than
30 meters long.
E120-1
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Loudspeaker Cable: Single pair with solid copper conductor (1.25mm diameter) in flat
configuration with polyethene insulation and PVC jacket. Conductors to have a maximum
DC loop resistance at 20 C of 28 ohms per kilometer and a nominal capacitance of 91
picofarads per meter.
Microphone Cable: Single pair screened with stranded copper conductors (13/0.2mm) with
PVC insulation lapped copper screen and PVC jacket. Conductors to have a maximum DC
loop resistance of 45.7 ohms per kilometer and a nominal capacitance of 430 picofarads per
meter.
Attendant Call Cable: Minimum 2.5 mm² cable as described in Part 2.01A above.
Slave Clock Cable: Minimum 1.5 mm² cable as described in Part 2.01A above.
Control cable: Multicore 2.5 mm² cable as described in part 2.01A above.
Part 3 - EXCUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Ensure conductor lengths for parallel feeders are equal.
B.
Lace or clip conductor groups at switchgear panels, pull boxes, wire ways, etc.
C.
Provide grounding conductors and straps in accordance with the grounding specification
Section.
D.
Wiring in conduits only to be installed after concrete, masonry and plastering work is
complete and all conduits has been cleaned out and dried.
E.
Splice cables at accessible junction or outlet boxes only.
F.
Color codes: all wiring insulation as per equipment identifications specification.
G.
Terminate cables in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations.
1.
Secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows:
Phases: phase "R" Brown, phase "S", Brown/orange, phase "T" Brown/ Black.
Neutral : Blue
Ground : Green / Yellow in combination or green
a. The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling wires” shall have color coding
unique and distinct (i.e. pink and purple) from the color coding indicated above. The unique
color codes shall be solid and in accordance with the NEC. Field coordinates for a final color
coding with the Resident Engineer.
2. Use solid color compound or solid color coating branch circuit conductors and neutral sizes.
4. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color coding shall conform to the
existing wiring system.
5. Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC.
3.02
FIELD TESTING
Field testing: Insulation resistance of all conductors shall be tested. Each conductor shall have its
insulation resistance tested after the insulation is completed and all splices, taps and connections
are made except connection to or into its source and point (or points) of termination. Insulation
resistance of conductors which are to operate at 600 volts or less shall be tested by using a Biddle
Megger of not less than 1000 volts d-c, insulation resistance of conductors rated at 600 volts shall be
free of shorts and grounds and have minimum resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground of at
least 10 mega ohms. Conductors that do not exceed insulation resistance values listed above shall
be removed at Contractor's expense and replaced and test repeated. The Contractor shall furnish all
instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed, and shall forward
copies of the test readings to the Owner in accordance with Section E010. These test reports shall
identify each conductor tested, date and time of test and weather conditions. Each test shall be
signed by the party making the test.
- - - END - - -
E120-2
SECTION E122
600 VOLT CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORKED INCLUDED
2
Single and multi core insulated power conductors rated 600 volts, sized 10 mm and greater.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Grounding and Bonding
B.
Wiring
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.S. 6360, 6004, 6207, 6476, 6346, 5468
B.
IEC 502
C.
IEC 228
D.
IEC 287
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide Product Data and manufacturers literature
B.
Provide Operation and Maintenance Data
D.
Submit completed factory any site test sheets
E.
Sample of cable pulling lubricant
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Cables shall be one, three of four cores consisting of 99% conductivity, bare annealed
stranded copper conductors rated at a normal maximum operating temperature of 90
degrees
2
B.
Insulation for cables 10 mm and greater shall be of extruded semi-conducting cross-linked
polyethylene, meeting standards requirements. A semi-conducting tape may be used under
the polyethylene.
C.
Provide a PVC overall jacket on all cables, with a durable marking on the surface of the
jacket at intervals not exceeding 610mm. marking shall include manufacturers name,
conductor size and voltage class of cable.
D.
Cable capacity and electrical characteristics shall conform with specified codes and
standards.
E.
Provide a ground wire with each circuit sized in accordance with the grounding specification
Section. Ground wire shall be bare, concentric lay copper.
F.
Where armoring is required, it shall be steel strip armor on single core cables and
galvanized steel or tape armor on multi-core cables.
2.02
SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A.
Cable splices and terminations shall be furnished in kit form and shall conform to the
recommendations of the cable manufacturer. All material shall be furnished in factory sealed
packages and shall not be opened until required for use.
B.
Splices shall be suitable for installation in manholes
C.
Terminal connectors shall be pressure; bolted clamp or compression type.
2.03
CABLE TIES AND CABLE MARKERS
A.
Lacing material for site installed cable shall be non-releasing nylon ties.
E122-1
B.
2.04
Tie-on cable markers shall be provided in accordance with equipment identification
specification Section.
CU/XLPE/SWA/PVC:
A.
CU/XLPE/SWA/PVC:
1.
To BS 5468, 1000V grade
2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.05
Conductors: Plain annealed copper to BS 6360
Cables shall comprise of plain copper, stranded circular conductors insulated with
an adequate thickness of extruded cross linked polythene (XLPE).
Conductors shall be laid up together and wormed circular with suitable pre-formed
fillers and worming, bound with polythene terephthalate (PTP) tape and covered with
an extruded PVC sheath minimum 1.4 mm thick.
Multicore cables shall have steel wire or tape armoring, extruded sheath of black
PVC.
Single core cables shall be unarmored, unless otherwise specified, with an extruded
black PVC outer sheath.
Outer sheath of single and multicore shall be at least 2.5mm thick.
Design electrical stress at any point in the insulation shall not exceed 3KV per mm.
Conductor screen: non-metallic comprising of either:
a.
Semi-conducting tape; or
b.
A layer of extruded semi-conducting material.
The electro-static screen over insulation shall comprise of a non-metallic layer of
semi-conducting tape or extruded semi-conducting material applied over the
insulation and in direct contact with it, followed by a layer of copper tape applied
helically over the semi- conducting layer to ensure close contact throughout.
Prevent void formation in insulation by careful control of its passage through the
temperature graded water baths.
XLPE/SWA/PVC/LSF
A. The electrical supply from the main LV switchboard to the local distribution boards shall be
distributed via XLPE/SWA/PVC/LSF cables with copper conductors, installed on cable trays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Support internal horizontal and vertical runs on cable tray using non-ferrous clamps at 1
meter intervals.
B.
Arrange multicore cables to run parallel on tray with a lateral spacing of the diameter of the
largest cable.
C.
Arrange single core cables with phases in trefoil formation providing one cable diameter
space between trefoil groups.
D.
Where cables are routed through walls or floors, the opening between the cables and the
structure shall be sealed such that the fire resistance of the sealing barrier is at least as
great as the surrounding structure.
3.02
EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Immediately prior to the placement of each cable or cable group, the raceway route to be
followed shall be inspected and ascertained to be complete in installation and free of all
materials detrimental to the cable or its placement. All cables assigned to a particular duct or
conduit shall be grouped and pulled in simultaneously, using cable grips or pulling eyes and
acceptable lubricants.
E122-2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
All cables shall be carefully checked both as to size and length before being pulled into
conduits or ducts. Cable pulled into the wrong conduit or duct or cut too short to rack, train,
and splice as specified herein, shall be removed and replaced.
Cable in manholes, Shafts,… etc.: Cable shall be supported at all times without short bends
or excessive sags and shall not be permitted to lie on the manhole floor. Cable ends must
not be submerged. Cable racks, saddle supports or trays shall be provided for permanent
support. Temporary support required during placement shall be with rope slings, timbers, or
alternate method acceptable to the Client Engineer.
Cable shall be located in manholes to provide minimum interference with other cables to be
installed or installation of future cables in spare conduits.
Cable Pulling: Pulling shall be done with nylon or rope recommended by cable manufacturer.
Cable Grips: Factory installed pulling eyes shall be used for pulling cable where they are
2
available. Woven wire cable grips shall be used to pull all single conductor cable, 70 mm
2
and larger. Pulling loops shall be used to pull single conductor cable smaller than 70 mm .
When a cable grip or pulling eye is used for pulling, the area of the cable covered by the grip
or seal plus 150 mm shall be cut off and discarded when the pull is completed.
Inspection: The outside of each cable reel shall be carefully inspected and protruding nails,
fastenings, or other objects which might damage the cable shall be removed. A thorough
visual inspection for flaws, breaks, or abrasions in the cable sheath shall be made as the
cable leaves the reel, and the pulling speed shall be slow enough to permit this inspection.
Damage to the sheath or finish of the cable shall be sufficient cause for rejecting the cable.
Cable damaged in any way during installation shall be replaced.
Pulling Tension: The pulling tension of any cable shall not exceed the maximum tension
recommended by the cable manufacturer. Pulling mechanisms of both the manual and
power types used by the Contractor shall have the rated capacity in tons clearly marked on
the mechanism. Whenever the capacity of the pulling mechanism exceeds the
recommended pulling tension of the cable as given by the cable manufacturer, a
dynamometers shall be used to show the tension on the cable and the indicator shall be
constantly watched. If any excessive strain develops, the pulling operation shall be stopped
at once and the difficulty determined and corrected.
Sidewall Pressure: To avoid insulation damage from excessive sidewall pressure at bends in
duct and conduit runs, the pulling tension in kilograms at a bend shall not exceed 450 times
the radius of the bend in metres.
Cable Bends: Extreme care shall be exercised during the placement of all cable to prevent
tension and bending conditions in excess of the manufacturer's recommendations. The
permanent radius of bend after cable installation shall be in accordance with the cable
manufacturer's recommendations.
Supports: All cable supports and securing devices shall have bearing surfaces located
parallel to the surfaces of the cable sheath and shall be installed to provide adequate
support without deformation of the cable jackets or insulation.
Final inspection shall be made after all cable is in place and, where supports, bushings, and
end bells deform the cable jacket, additional supports shall be provided. Additional cable
protection such as a wrapping of light rubber belting, friction tape, or similar materials shall
be provided when required. Cable in vertical runs shall be supported by woven wire grips in
accordance with the Code requirements.
Cable Identification: The Contractor shall identify all cables in the locations specified in the
equipment identification spec Section.
Moisture Seals: Each cable shall be kept sealed except when termination and splicing work
is being performed.
The ends of all cables shall be sealed with heat shrinkable caps. Cap sizes shall be as
recommended by the cap manufacturer for the cable outside diameter and insulation. Caps
shall contain sufficient adhesive that shrinkage of the cap during application results in
formation of a positive watertight seal capable of withstanding complete immersion or total
exposure without permitting the entrance of moisture.
E122-3
L.
M.
N.
3.03
Before and after pulling, the leading and seal of each length of cable shall be examined and
repaired if necessary. All cut cable ends shall be promptly sealed after cutting except those
to be spliced or terminated.
Crimping Tools: Crimping tools used to secure conductors in compression type connectors
or terminal lugs shall be those made for that purpose and for the conductor sizes involved.
Crimping tools shall be a product approved by the connector manufacturer. The Contractor
shall establish and maintain a tool certification program to ensure that crimping tools are
kept in accurate operating condition.
Termination: Cable shall be terminated in accordance with the following requirements.
- Train cable in place and cut squarely to required length. Avoid sharp bends.
- Install terminals or terminal connectors as required, ensuring a firm metal-to-metal
contact.
- Insulate each connection of cable to an insulated conductor (whether cable, bus, or
equipment bushing). The insulation shall cover all exposed surfaces of the conductors;
the insulation voltage level of the completed termination shall be not less than the
insulation voltage level of the connected conductors. Insulation of terminations shall be
as specified in the following paragraphs.
Insulation of Termination in 600 volt Cable: Terminations which require insulation in cable
rated 600 volts or less shall be insulated in accordance with the following requirements:
- All exposed conductor and connector surfaces shall be covered with a minimum of three
half-lapped layers of self-vulcanizing rubber insulating tape.
- A minimum of three half-lapped layers of polyvinyl chloride electrical tape shall be
applied over the rubber tape. The polyvinyl chloride tape shall extend a minimum of two
cable diameters over the cable jacket and a similar distance over other conductor
insulation or connector requiring insulation.
Field Testing
Insulation resistance of all conductors shall b tested. Each conductor shall have its isolation
resistance tested after the installation is completed and all splices, taps and connections are made
except connection to or into its source and point (or points) of termination. Insulation resistance of
conductors which are to operate at 600 volts roles shall be tested by using a Biddle Megger of not
less than 1000 volts d-c. Insulation resistance of conductors rated at 600 volts shall be free of shorts
and grounds and have a minimum resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground of at least 10
mega ohms. Conductors that do not exceed insulation resistance valves listed above shall be
removed at Contractor’s expense and replaced and test repeated. The Contractor shall furnish all
instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed, and shall forward
copies of the test readings to the Owner in accordance with Section E10. These test reports shall
identify each conductor tested, date and time of test and weather conditions. Each test shall be
signed by the party making the test.
- - - END - - -
E122-4
SECTION E125
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the general grounding and bonding requirements for electrical equipment
and operations to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
B. “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NEC, as well as made,
supplementary, and lightning protection system grounding electrodes.
C. The terms “connect” and “bond” is used interchangeably in this specification and have the same
meaning.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section E050, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Clearly present enough information to determine compliance with drawings and
specifications.
2. Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and the routing of
aboveground and underground grounding electrode conductors.
C. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports of ground resistance.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification that the materials and installation are in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Certification by the contractor that the complete installation has been properly installed and
tested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 44 or UL 83 insulated stranded copper, except that
sizes 6 mm² and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all
equipment grounding conductors.
B. Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded copper, except that sizes No. 6 mm² and
smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire.
C. Conductor sizes shall not be less than shown on the drawings, or not less than required by the
NEC, whichever is greater.
2.02 GROUND RODS
A. Steel or copper clad steel, 0.75 in [19 mm] diameter by 3 Meter long, conforming to UL 467.
B. Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground resistance, as shown on the
drawings.
2.03 CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODE
Concrete encased electrode shall be No. 25 mm² bare copper wire, installed per NEC.
E125 - 1
2.04 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog
number, and permitted conductor size(s).
2.05 GROUND CONNECTIONS
A. Below Grade: Exothermic-welded type connectors.
B. Above Grade:
1. Bonding Jumpers: Compression-type connectors, using zinc-plated fasteners and external
tooth lockwashers.
2. Connection to Building Steel: Exothermic-welded type connectors.
3. Ground Busbars: Two-hole compression type lugs, using tin-plated copper or copper alloy
bolts and nuts.
4. Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: One-hole compression-type lugs, using zinc-plated or
copper alloy fasteners.
2.06 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS
Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework of open or cabinetenclosed equipment racks with minimum dimensions of 4 mm thick x 19 mm wide.
2.07 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS
At any equipment mounting location (e.g., backboards and hinged cover enclosures) where racktype ground bars cannot be mounted, provide screw lug-type terminal blocks.
2.08 GROUNDING BUS
Pre-drilled rectangular copper bar with stand-off insulators, minimum 6.3 mm thick x 100 mm high
in cross-section, length as shown on drawings, with 7.1 mm holes spaced 28 mm apart.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Ground in accordance with the NEC, as shown on drawings, and as specified herein.
B. System Grounding:
1. Secondary service neutrals: Ground at the supply side of the secondary disconnecting means
and at the related transformers.
2. Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service entrance): Ground
the secondary neutral.
C. Equipment Grounding: Metallic structures, including ductwork and building steel, enclosures,
raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, and other conductive items in
close proximity with electrical circuits, shall be bonded and grounded.
3.02 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
Make grounding connections, which are normally buried or otherwise inaccessible (except
connections for which access for periodic testing is required), by exothermic weld.
3.03 MEDIUM VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS
A. Switchgear: Provide a bare grounding electrode conductor from the switchgear ground bus to the
grounding electrode system.
B. Duct Banks and Manholes: Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor in each duct
containing medium voltage conductors, sized per NEC except that minimum size shall be 25
mm². Bond the equipment grounding conductors to the switchgear ground bus, to all manhole
E125 - 2
hardware and ground rods, to the cable shielding grounding provisions of medium-voltage cable
splices and terminations, and to equipment enclosures.
C. Pad-Mounted Transformers:
1. Provide a driven ground rod and bond with a grounding electrode conductor to the
transformer grounding pad.
2. Ground the secondary neutral.
D. Lightning Arresters: Connect lightning arresters to the equipment ground bus or ground rods as
applicable.
3.04 SECONDARY VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS
A. Main Bonding Jumper: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground bus in the service
equipment.
B. Metallic Piping, Building Steel, and Supplemental Electrode(s):
1. Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between the service equipment
ground bus and all metallic water pipe systems, building steel, and supplemental or made
electrodes. Provide jumper insulating joints in the metallic piping. All connections to
electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 467.
2. Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding electrode system.
C. Service Disconnect (Separate Individual Enclosure): Provide a ground bar bolted to the enclosure
with lugs for connecting the various grounding conductors.
D. Switchgear, Switchboards, Unit Substations, Panel boards, Motor Control Centers and Panel
boards, Engine-Generators, and Automatic Transfer Switches:
1. Connect the various feeder equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus in the
enclosure with suitable pressure connectors.
2. For service entrance equipment, connect the grounding electrode conductor to the ground
bus.
3. Provide ground bars, bolted to the housing, with sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment
grounding conductors.
4. Connect metallic conduits that terminate without mechanical connection to the housing, by
grounding bushings and grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.
3.05 RACEWAY
A. Conduit Systems:
1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment
grounding conductor.
2. Non-metallic conduit systems, except non-metallic feeder conduits that carry a grounded
conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance
equipment, shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.
3. Conduit that only contains a grounding conductor, and is provided for its mechanical
protection, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.
4. Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical connection to electrical equipment
housing by means of locknut and bushings or adapters, shall be provided with grounding
bushings. Connect bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the equipment ground bus.
B. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power
and lighting branch circuits.
C. Boxes, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panel boards:
1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device
box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special
grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown).
2. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding conductor termination.
D. Wire way Systems:
E125 - 3
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1. Bond the metallic structures of wire way to provide 100% electrical continuity throughout the
wire way system, by connecting a No. 6 AWG [16 mm²] bonding jumper at all intermediate
metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.
2. Install insulated No. 16 mm² bonding jumpers between the wire way system, bonded as
required above, and the closest building ground at each end and approximately every 6
Meter.
3. Use insulated No. 16 mm² bonding jumpers to ground or bond metallic wire way at each end
for all intermediate metallic enclosures and across all section junctions.
4. Use insulated No. 16 mm² bonding jumpers to ground cable tray to column-mounted building
ground plates (pads) at each end and approximately every 15 Meter.
Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting screws. Ground receptacles with a
jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the device box ground screw and a jumper
to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system when the
green ground is provided; otherwise, ground the fixtures through the conduit systems. Fixtures
connected with flexible conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wires from
the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.
Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shall be provided with a ground lug for termination of
the equipment grounding conductor.
Raised Floors: Provide bonding of all raised floor components. //See details on the drawings. //
Panel board Bonding in Patient Care Areas: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the
normal and essential branch circuit panel boards serving the same individual patient vicinity shall
be bonded together with an insulated continuous copper conductor not less than No. 10 AWG [16
mm²]. These conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit.
3.06 CORROSION INHIBITORS
When making ground and ground bonding connections, apply a corrosion inhibitor to all contact
surfaces. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between the metals
used.
3.07 CONDUCTIVE PIPING
A. Bond all conductive piping systems, interior and exterior, to the grounding electrode system.
Bonding connections shall be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bus.
B. In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds, bond the gases and
suction piping at the outlets directly to the room or patient ground bus.
3.08 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Bond the lightning protection system to the electrical grounding electrode system.
3.09 ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING
Building Earth Ground Busbars: Provide ground busbar and mounting hardware at each electrical
room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building grounding ring.
3.10 GROUND RESISTANCE
A. Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 1 ohm. Make any modifications or
additions to the grounding electrode system necessary for compliance without additional cost to
the owner. Final tests shall ensure that this requirement is met.
B. Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a four-terminal fall-ofpotential method as defined in IEEE 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before
the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not
fewer than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding
electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The
E125 - 4
combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the
specified number of electrodes must still be provided.
C. Services at power company interface points shall comply with the power company ground
resistance requirements.
D. Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by the //Resident Engineer// //COTR// prior
to backfilling. The contractor shall notify the //Resident Engineer// //COTR// 24 hours before the
connections are ready for inspection.
---END---
E125 - 5
SECTION E130
BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the furnishing and installation of outlet and switch boxes, floor boxes,
junction boxes and pull boxes.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. BS4607 PVC boxes
B. IEC-670
C. BS 1363
D. BS-4662
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on the following:
1- Floor boxes.
2- Fire-rated poke-through units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Flush Wiring Accessories Boxes. Provide PVC boxes of sufficient size to accommodate wiring
accessories to be installed at outlet or switch. Provide an extension ring for the device(s) to be installed.
Square or rectangular boxes may be used. Unless otherwise noted, provide minimum 3.5 cm deep by
7X7 cm minimum size box.
B. Exposed Wiring Accessories Boxes. Provide PVC boxes for surface mounting in areas having
exposed rigid PVC conduit systems and metallic boxes for surface mounting in areas having exposed
rigid metallic conduits.
C. Boxes for Lighting Fixtures. Provide PVC circular boxes as required to properly support ceiling and
bracket-type lighting fixtures. Unless otherwise noted, provide 3 cm deep by 6 cm diameter.
D. Masonry Boxes. Provide galvanized steel, 3.5 cm deep, and masonry boxes for all devices installed
in masonry walls.
2.02 JUNCTION, PULL AND SPLICE BOXES
A. Construction. Provide PVC boxes conforming to BS 4607.
B. Interior Spaces. Provide BS 4662 type boxes at least 3.5 cm deep.
C. Exterior Spaces. Provide BS 4662 12X type boxes at least 3.5 cm deep.
D. Embedded. Provide BS 4662 12X cast iron type with flush flanged cover when cast in concrete.
2.03 FIRE-RATED POKE-THROUGH UNITS
A. Construction. Through-floor units shall comply with BS 4662.
B. Fire Rating. Through-floor units shall be classified with a fire rating of 2 hours in a floor which is 6 cm
thick.
C. Box and Conduit. Under floor junction box and conduit shall be self supporting without the attachment
of an above-floor fitting. The integral fire barrier must incorporate a cold smoke barrier to prevent the
passage of smoke when heat is not present. The junction box shall be 12 cm square by 8 cm deep with
knockouts to accommodate up to 1-inch conduits. Box and conduit shall be provided with separation
barriers for combination power and communication units. Through-floor unit shall allow replacement of
original service fittings with different style service fittings of similar or dissimilar service function, including
abandonment condition.
E130 - 1
D. Above-Floor Fittings. Provide die-cast aluminum above-floor fitting with satin chrome finished cover.
Provide a combination power and communication fitting. Power section shall be equipped with a 15ampere, 220-volt. Communication section shall have a cover plate with a 5/8-inch bushed opening.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
U
3.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Flush Boxes. Unless otherwise indicated, mount all outlet boxes flush within 6 mm of the finished wall
or ceiling line. Provide extension rings where required to extend the box forward in conformance to BS
and IEC requirements. Attach ring with at least two machine screws. Securely fasten outlet boxes.
Provide plaster covers for all boxes in plastered walls and ceilings.
B. Fixture Boxes. Where boxes for suspended lighting fixtures are attached to and supported from
suspended ceilings, adequately distribute the load over the ceiling support members.
C. Mounting Height. Mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box means the height from finished floor
to horizontal center line of the cover plate. Where outlets are indicated adjacent to each other, mount
these outlets in a symmetrical pattern with all tops at the same elevation. Where outlets are indicated
adjacent, but with different mounting heights, line up outlets to form a symmetrical vertical pattern on
the wall. Verify the final location of each outlet with Owner's representative before rough-in. Remove
and relocate any outlet box placed in an unsuitable location.
D. Back-to-Back Boxes. Do not connect outlet boxes back to back unless approval is obtained from the
Owner's representative. Where such a connection is necessary to complete a particular installation, fill
the voids around the wire between the boxes with sound insulating material.
E. Box Openings. Provide only the conduit openings necessary to accommodate the conduits at the
individual location.
3.02 FLOOR BOXES
A. Verify locations of all floor boxes with the Owner's representative before installation. Completely
envelope floor boxes in concrete except at the top. Increase slab thickness at boxes if required to
obtain a minimum of 30 mm of concrete below bottom of box. Adjust covers flush with finished floor.
3.03 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Installation. Install boxes as required to facilitate cable installation in raceway systems. Generally
provide boxes in conduit runs of more than 30 meters or as required in Section E110.
B. Covers. Provide boxes so that covers are readily accessible and easily removable after completion of
the installation. Include suitable access doors for boxes above inaccessible ceilings. Select a practical
size for each box and cover.
3.04 FIRE-RATED POKE-THROUGH UNITS
A. Installation. Floor slab or deck shall be core-drilled to accept through floor conduit unit. Install per
manufacturer's recommendations.
---END---
E130 - 2
SECTION E140
WIRING ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of wiring accessories.
1.02
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
BS 3676, 1363.
B.
IEC.
C.
ANSI/UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches.
D.
ANSI/UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
E.
NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS, submit the
following:
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, construction materials, grade and
termination information.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver two copies of the following to the Resident
Engineer: Technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement units.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit two copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer: Certification by the Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and
specifications, and have been properly installed, aligned, and tested.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
WALL SWITCHES
A.
General
1.
Body and base shall be fully enclosed type, fire resistant, non-absorptive
thermosetting phenolic compound.
2.
Mounting yoke shall be corrosion resistant metal with plastic ears.
3.
Switches shall be flush mounted and wired with terminals of screw clamp type.
Wiring terminal shall be suitable for holding two 4 mm2 wires.
4.
Color: all emergency switches shall be red. Coordinate color of all other switches
with the site engineer prior to ordering.
5.
Rating: 15 Amps, 220 Volts, 50 Hz.
B.
Lighting Switches:
1.
Lighting switches shall be snap type, in accordance with code, heavy duty,
general use type, and single pole, double pole, single, two-way or intermediate as
shown on the drawings.
E140-1
2.
3.
4.
2.02
2.03
Quick-Make, quick-break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting molded
base, with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive
loads up to full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
Water Proof Switch: Installed in wet area such as mechanical rooms, outdoors or
as shown on drawings, with waterproof plate, water proof outlet box, IP44
enclosure.
Double Pole Pilot Switch: rated as shown on the drawings, 230V AC, tumbler
operated with red neon pilot light for off position. Switch is to be mounted to flush
or surface box, as indicated on the drawings. Provided with cord outlet and cord
extension to equipment controlled.
RECEPTACLES
1.
Generally: all receptacles, unless otherwise indicated, shall have injection molded plastic
base with self-adjusting, non-expanding contacts to prevent permanent distortion, flush
mounted and arranged for side and/or back connection and with screw terminals
accepting at least three parallel branch-circuit wires.
2.
Color: all emergency outlets shall be used. Coordinate color of all other outlets with the
site engineer prior to ordering.
3.
Mounting yokes shall be corrosion resistant metal.
4.
Bodies shall be ivory in color.
5.
One or more of the following receptacles shall be provided as shown on the drawings:
1.
Single receptacle, polarized, grounding type, with three rectangular pin-holes two
poles and earth, rated 16A, 230V. Switched, with robust shutter mechanism
operated by earth pin.
2.
Duplex receptacle: are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with
break-off feature for two circuit connection.
3.
Weatherproof receptacle: 16A, 230V, 2 pole plus earth, enclosed in surface
mounted cast-metal box and with spring-retained gasket hinged flap cover.
Receptacle splash sparkles type and proof to IP54. Outlet is to be used.
4.
Sparkless Receptacle: Outlet: type is similar to weather proof outlet, but to be
used in operating theaters and without the spring retained gasket hinged flap
cover.
5.
Power Receptacles: Single Outlet, singe phase, three wire, 30A, 230V, polarized
with L-shaped earth contact, splash proof mold cast metal plated and matching
plug. Outlet to be provided with an on-off switch.
6.
Industrial Socket Outlet: 3 phase, 16 A or 32A, 3P+N+E, 220-250V, single, with
aluminum alloy enclosure, interlocked switch and matching plug.
7.
Shaver Receptacle: Single receptacle complete with double around isolating
transformer with thermal overload protection, on/off switch and pilot light
indicator. Receptacle to accept shaver plug tops to British, American and
European Standards.
DIMMER SWITCH
E140-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.04
Dimmer switches should be used to control individual incandescent or fluorescent lighting
circuits.
The dimmer switch shall be of electronic with thermostat control, factory calibrated, of
suitable and rated for type and number of lamps indicated on the drawings for operation
at 220 volts, 50 Hz.
The dimmer switch shall be complete with and on/off toggle switch and a sliding dimmer
capable of smooth continuous changes of lighting intensity form 1% for incandescent
lamps and from 5% for fluorescent up to 100% light output.
Dimmer switch shall be radio frequency interference shielded and capable of operating at
40 degrees C ambient temperature.
Components are to be designed, rated and installed so that dimmer operates
continuously at any setting. Components are to be installed in separate enclosure or as
part of dimmer control panel as indicated on the drawings.
WALL PLATES
A. Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless steel or smooth nylon .
Oversize plates are not acceptable.
B. Color shall be ivory unless otherwise specified.
C. Standard NEMA design, so that products of different manufacturers will be interchangeable.
Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be accordance with NEMA WD 6.
D. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each other, wall plates shall be common for
each group of receptacles or switches.
E. In psychiatric areas, wall plates shall be 302 stainless steel, have tamperproof screws and
beveled edges.
F. Wall plates for data, telephone or other communication outlets shall be as specified in the
associated specification.
G. Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Circuit:
1. Bodies shall be red in color. Wall plates shall be red with the word "EMERGENCY" engraved
in 6 mm, (1/4 inch) white letters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the drawings.
B. Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box with an approved green
bonding jumper, and also connected to the green equipment grounding conductor.
C. Outlet boxes for light and dimmer switches shall be mounted on the strike side of doors.
D. Provide barriers in multi gang outlet boxes to separate systems of different voltages, Normal
Power and Emergency Power systems, and in compliance with the NEC.
E. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as
necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. Coordinate the electrical work
with the work of other trades to ensure that wiring device flush outlets are positioned with box
openings aligned with the face of the surrounding finish material. Pay special attention to
installations in cabinet work, and in connection with laboratory equipment.
F. Exact field locations of floors, walls, partitions, doors, windows, and equipment may vary from
locations shown on the drawings. Prior to locating sleeves, boxes and chases for roughing-in of
conduit and equipment, the Contractor shall coordinate exact field location of the above items with
other trades. In addition, check for exact direction of door swings so that local switches are
properly located on the strike side.
G. Install wall switches 1200mm above floor, OFF position down.
H. Install wall dimmers 1200mm above floor; derate ganged dimmers as instructed by manufacturer; do
not use common neutral.
E140-3
I.
Install convenience receptacles 400mm above floor, 152mm above counter backsplash or
workbenches. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the drawings.
J. Label device plates with a permanent adhesive label listing panel and circuit feeding the wiring
device.
K. Test wiring devices for damaged conductors, high circuit resistance, poor connections, inadequate
fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems using a portable receptacle tester.
Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as
specified above.
L. Test GFCI devices for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
---END---
E140-4
SECTION E281
LOW-VOLTAGE POWER FACTOR CAPACITORS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes design, supply, install and test power-factor correction capacitors and accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit outline and mounting dimensions, weights, voltage and capacity ratings, fusing
and accessories.
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, ratings, and connections to distribution system of
each capacitor.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include cell and fuse replacement instructions.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum
three years [documented] experience.
1.05 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. Radio frequency interference suppression, as BS EN 55014:1993.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ENERAL
A. The contractor shall supply, install and connect a complete Capacitor Bank with control
equipment for automatically controlling the connection and disconnection of capacitances in
response to changes in the load power factor. The bank shall be free standing individual unit or
part of the switchboard as indicated on the Drawings. The bank shall provide a complete
automatic regulation of the connected capacitor power at peak and off peak times.
B. The bank shall be fully assembled and internally connected. All equipment shall be suitable for
continuous operation within the specified ambient conditions.
C. The capacitor banks shall comprise one cubicle for protection and control equipment and steel
racks for the capacitor units.
D. A discharge resistor shall be fitted in the terminal box of each capacitor unit.
E. The set of equipment for one capacitor 'step' shall comprise one triple pole contactor and a three
phase fuse unit with fuses.
F. The cubicle shall contain busbars for the main supply cable, terminal blocks for leads for the
current transformer, control lead fuses. A reactive power regulator, together with capacitor step
indicator lamps shall be mounted on the door of the cubicle. A shunt connected harmonic filter
shall be included in the capacitor bank assembly.
G. The equipment ratings shall be selected to give a generous margin to withstand the high
capacitor currents due to harmonics on the system voltage.
H. The equipment shall comply with BSEN 55014:1993 with respect to electro- magnetic radio
interference.
2.02
CAPACITORS
A. Capacitors shall be of proven and established design. Capacitors shall conform to IEC-831-1,2
B. Capacitor elements shall comprise a winding of metalized film dielectric and incorporate an
internal fuse link, all resin encapsulated and mounted in plastic container. All capacitors shall be
self healing type.
C. Capacitors shall be low loss type. Losses shall be less than 0.5 watts per KVAR.
D. Capacitors shall have a dielectric voltage rating of 480 V 3 phase, 50 HZ.
E281 - 1
E. Capacitor units shall comprise of a sheet steel enclosure incorporating a number of capacitor
elements. The enclosure shall be filled with granules or suitable proven alternative to absorb the
energy of any major element failure.
F. Unit of equal capacitance shall be interchangeable.
G. Every capacitor shall be capable of operating for prolonged periods, without damage, at voltage
10 percent higher than the rated voltage.
H. All capacitors shall be capable of operating without damage under conditions in which the current
through it has an r.m.s. value exceeding by 15 percent the current corresponding to the rated
(sinusoidal) voltage and frequency.
I. Each capacitor shall be labeled to warn of possible voltage damages.
2.03
ROTECTION
A. The capacitor banks shall be equipped with dust-tight, hose-proof terminal boxes, to IP55.
B. The surface treatment of the capacitor units and the cubicles shall be suitable for outdoor
installations. The sheet-metal surface shall be treated with primer and finished in two-component
baked enamel.
C. The control equipment cubicle shall be provided with ventilation openings if used in door only.
D. Each cubicle and all of the equipment within it shall be so arranged that every item of apparatus
is readily accessible of adjustment, where this may be necessary and for maintenance.
2.04
OWER FACTOR REGULATOR
A. The power factor regulator shall be microprocessor based and shall be programmable at site.
B. The Power Factor Regulator program shall permit different switching circuits depending upon the
targeted phase angle. Regulator operation shall be insensitive to harmonics and shall have an
automatic no-volt release suitable for operation in temperature up to 70deg. C.
C. The power factor regulator shall have "AUTOMATIC" or "MANUAL" control facility. The desired
power factor shall be adjustable from 0.9 capacitive to 0.7 inductive. Capacitor switching time
shall be adjustable from 1 to 99 seconds.
D. The regulator shall be flush mounted in the cubicle door and shall have built in digital power factor
meter and fault indicator. LED indications shall be provided to indicate Number of steps switched
on, Capacitive or Inductive load.
E. The power factor regulator shall have means to adapt itself to network phase rotation and
reversal of current transformer terminals.
Principle of Operation:
A. The power factor regulator shall continuously sense (The reactive power) of the circuit being
considered for power factor correction. If the computed power factor differs from the targeted
factor for more than 10 seconds, the regulator shall switch a contactor to switch into or out of the
circuit. Contactors shall be opened or closed as required to bring the circuit power factor closer to
the targeted one. Only one capacitor shall be switched at a time.
2.05
ONTACTORS
A. Contactors used in capacitor bank circuits shall be suitable for capacitor switching duty and shall
withstand large transient current peaks at high frequency.
B. The contactors shall have a life time of minimum 100,000 operations under capacitor switching
conditions. Contactors shall be rated for 1.5 times the normal rated current of the capacitors. The
contactors shall conform to IEC 947-4-1.
2.06
uses
A. Three phase high rupture capacity fuses shall be provided for each capacitor step. Fuses shall be
modern industrial design, current limiting type with a breaking capacity exceeding 100 KA.
B. Fuses shall conform to the requirement of IEC 269.
C. The utilization category of the fuses shall be gG. They shall be plug-in type with proper fuse.
---END---
E281 - 2
SECTION E440
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the distribution switchboards.
1.02 FACTORY TESTS:
A. Design Tests: Design tests shall have been performed on a type or style of switchboard similar to
that being furnished for this project. Tests shall be in accordance with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
B. Production Tests: Dielectric, mechanical operation, grounding of instrument transformer cases,
electrical operation and control wiring, and ground fault sensing equipment tests shall be
performed on the switchboards provided for this project. Tests shall be in accordance with NEMA
PB 2 and UL 891.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
Submit in accordance with Section, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (ELECTRICAL):
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting details, materials, required clearances,
terminations, weight, temperature rise, wiring and connection diagrams, plan, front, side, and
rear elevations, sectional views, bus work, circuit breaker frame sizes, trip and short-circuit
rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous and ground fault settings, coordinated breaker
and fuse curves, accessories, and device nameplate data.
3. Show the size, ampere-rating, number of bars per phase and neutral in each bus run
(horizontal and vertical), bus spacing, equipment ground bus, and bus material.
B. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings, companion copies of complete maintenance
and operating manuals including technical data sheets, wiring diagrams, and information for
ordering replacement parts.
a. Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation, maintenance,
and operation.
b. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between the items of equipment.
c. Provide a clear and concise description of operation, which gives, in detail, the
information required to properly operate the equipment.
d. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop
drawings.
2. Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver three copies of the final updated maintenance and
operating manuals to the Resident Engineer.
a. The manuals shall be updated to include any information necessitated by shop drawing
approval.
b. Complete "As Installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be included which show all
items of equipment and their interconnecting wiring.
c. Show all terminal identification.
d. Include information for testing, repair, trouble shooting, assembly, disassembly, and
recommended maintenance intervals.
e. Provide a replacement parts list with current prices. Include a list of recommended spare
parts, tools, and instruments for testing and maintenance purposes.
f. Furnish manuals in loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard binder.
C. Certifications:
E440-1
1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the Resident
Engineer:
a. Certification by the Contractor that the assemblies have been properly installed, adjusted
and tested, including circuit breakers settings.
b. Certified copies of all of the factory design and production tests, field test data sheets and
reports for the assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL:
A. Switchboards shall be in accordance with NEC, IEEE, and as shown on the drawings.
B. Switchboards shall be provided complete, ready for operation including, but not limited to housing,
buses, circuit breakers, instruments and related transformers, fuses, and wiring.
C. Switchboard dimensions shall not exceed the space provided as shown on the drawings.
D. Manufacturer’s nameplate shall include complete ratings of switchboard in addition to the date of
manufacture.
2.02 BASIC ARRANGEMENT:
A. Type I: Switchboard shall be front accessible with the following features:
1. Device mounting:
a. Main breaker: Individually mounted and compartmented or group mounted with feeder
breakers.
b. Feeder breakers: Group mounted.
2. Section alignment: As shown on the drawings.
3. Accessibility:
a. Main section line and load terminals: Front.
b. Distribution section line and load terminals: Front.
c. Through bus connections: Front .
4. Bolted line and load connections.
5. Full height wiring gutter covers for access to wiring terminals.
6. Short Circuit Current Rating: as shown on the drawings, whichever is higher.
2.03 HOUSING:
A. Provide a completely enclosed, free standing, steel enclosure not less than the gage required by
the ANSI and UL standards. The enclosure is to consist of the required number of vertical
sections bolted together to form one metal enclosed rigid switchboard. The sides, top and rear
shall be covered with removable screw on sheet steel plates.
B. Provide ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature rise of current carrying parts.
All openings shall be protected against entrance of falling dirt, water, or foreign matter.
C. Group the meters and their control switches on a hinged front cover. Provide concealed hinges
and latch.
D. Enclosure shall be thoroughly cleaned, phosphate treated, and primed with rust-inhibiting paint,
Final finish coat to be the manufacturers standard gray. Provide a quart of finish paint for touch-up
purposes.
2.04 BUSES:
A. General: Buses shall be arranged for 3 phase, 4 wire distribution. Main phase buses (through
bus), full size neutral bus, and ground bus shall be full capacity the entire length of the
switchboard. Provide for future extensions by means of bolt holes or other approved method.
Brace the bus to withstand the available short circuit current at the particular location and as
shown on the drawings. No magnetic material shall be used between buses to form a magnetic
loop.
E440-2
B. Material and Size: Buses and connections shall be hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.
Bus temperature rise shall not exceed 65 degrees C . Section busing shall be sized based on UL
and NEMA Switchboard Standards.
C. Bus Connections: All contact surfaces shall be copper. Provide a minimum of two plated bolts per
splice. Where physical bus size permits only one bolt, provide a means other than friction to
prevent turning, twisting or bending. Torque bolts to the manufacturer's recommended values.
D. Neutral Bus: Provide bare or plated bus and mount on insulated bus supports. Provide neutral
disconnect link to permit isolation of neutral bus from the common ground bus and service
entrance conductors.
E. Ground Bus: Provide an uninsulated 6 mm by 50 mm copper equipment ground bus bar sized
per UL 891 the length of the switchboard and secure at each section.
2.05 INTERNALLY INTEGRATED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
A. Integral Surge Suppressor:
1. SPD (Surge Protective Devices) shall be Component Recognized and listed in accordance
with UL 1449 Second Edition to include Section 37.3 highest fault category testing on devices
intended for service entrance use. SPD shall also be UL 1283 listed.
2. SPD shall be UL 67 listed, installed by and shipped from the electrical distribution equipment
manufacturer’s factory.
3. SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L-N, L-G, N-G, in
WYE systems, and L-L, L-G in DELTA systems.
4. SPD shall be modular in design. Each mode shall be fused with a 200kAIC UL recognized
surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout device.
5. SPD shall be integrally mounted to the bus bars of the switchboard.
6. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon
a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push
to test switch shall be provided as well.
7. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
a. Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be:
1) Service Entrance Switchboard 250 kA.
2) Distribution Panel boards E0 kA
3) Branch Panel boards E0 kA
4) Service Entrance MCC 240 kA specified.
5) Distribution Class MCC E0 kA
b. UL 1449 Second Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression Voltage Ratings
(SVR’s) for Service Entrance and Distribution Location equipment shall not exceed the
following:
8. SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of –50Db at 100 kHz with an insertion ration of
50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology.
9. SPD shall have the following diagnostic features: transient counter, status lights on each
phase, and one set of 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary dry contacts for alarming.
10. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five years, incorporating unlimited replacements of
suppressor parts if transients destroy them during the warranty period. Warranty shall be the
responsibility of the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be supported by
their respective field service division.
2.06 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS:
A. Nameplates: Provide laminated black phenolic resin with white core with 6 mm (1/4 inch) high
engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker (switch) to indicate the feeder, panelboards
and equipment served. Mount, with plated screws, on front of the breaker.
B. Mimic Bus: Provide an approved mimic bus on the front of the switchboard. Color to be blue (400
volt) or black (220 volt), either factory painted, plastic, or metal strips. Plastic tape shall not be
used. Use symbols similar to a one line diagram. (Refer to drawings). Plastic or metal strips shall
be mounted with plated screws.
E440-3
2.07 METERS AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, and the following:
1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 230 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3
with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios shall be as indicated with accuracy class and burden suitable
for connected relays, meters, and instruments.
3. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondaries to
ground overcurrent relays to provide selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker.
Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker ground-fault protection.
B. Power Circuit Monitoring and Control System: The Power Circuit Monitor shall be a multifunctional, digital, data acquisition and control device. The Power Circuit Monitor shall be metered
over 50 values and extensive Min/Max data can be viewed on the LED display. Each Circuit
Monitor shall offer true RMS metering and communications standard. Provide 0.2% accuracy true
RMS metering and other powerful features such as automatic relay control, waveform capture,
on-board event and data logging, and programmable logic for special applications like custom
data logging and control function. On-board memory can be expanded to add 512 K or 1024K.
Provide input/output modules, status inputs, a pulse output, relay outputs and analog inputs and
outputs.
1. Power Circuit Monitor shall be
a. Certified ANSI C12.E revenue accuracy
st
b. True RMS Metering through the 31 harmonic
c. High accuracy: 0.2% on current and voltage
d. Power quality readings displayed: THD and K-Factor
rd
e. Harmonic Analysis Data through 63 harmonic
f. Automatic Alarm/Relay control
g. On-board event and data logging
h. Waveform capture
i. UL listed, CSA Approved, CE Marketing, NOM Approved
j. MV-90 compatible
G. Recording Demand Meter: Usable as totalizing relay or as indicating and recording maximumdemand meter with 15-minute interval. Meter shall count and control a succession of pulses
entering two channels. House in draw out, back-connected case arranged for semi flush
mounting.
2.08
ROVISION FOR FUTURE:
A. Where "provision for", "future", or "space" is noted on drawings, the space shall be equipped
with bus connections to the future overcurrent device with suitable insulation and bracing to
maintain proper short circuit rating and physical clearance. Provide buses for the ampere
rating as shown for the future device.
2.09 BREAKER REMOVAL EQUIPMENT:
Where draw out circuit breakers are provided, furnish a portable elevating carriage or switchboard
mounted device for installation and removal of the breakers.
2.10 CONTROL WIRING:
Control wiring shall be 600 volt class B stranded SIS. Install all control wiring complete at the
factory adequately bundled and protected. Wiring across hinges and between shipping units shall
be Class C stranded. Size in accordance with NEC. Provide control circuit fuses.
E440-4
2.11 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
A. Type I Switchboard: Provide UL listed and labeled molded case circuit breakers in accordance
with NEC and as shown on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be the solid state adjustable trip
type.
1. Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:
a. Ampere setting (continuous).
b. Long time band.
c. Short time trip point.
d. Short time delay.
e. Instantaneous trip point.
f. Ground fault trip point.
g. Ground fault trip delay.
2. Trip settings shall be as indicated on the drawings. Final settings shall be as shown on the
electrical system protective device study.
3. Breakers, which have same rating, shall be interchangeable with each other.
B. Type II Switchboard:
1.
Provide UL listed and labeled molded case circuit breakers in accordance with NEC and as
shown on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be the solid state adjustable trip type.
a. Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:
1) Ampere setting (continuous).
2) Long time band.
3) Short time trip point.
4) Short time delay.
5) Instantaneous trip point.
6) Ground fault trip point.
7) Ground fault trip delay.
b. Trip settings shall be as indicated on the drawings. Final settings shall be as shown on
the electrical system protective device study.
c. Breakers, which have same rating, shall be interchangeable with each other.
2.
Provide low voltage AC power circuit breaker, with dead front, stored energy and solid state
trip device. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed (category PAQX).
a. Rating shall be 3-pole, 600 volts AC, 60-cycle with indicated frame size, trip rating and
system voltage. Interrupting rating shall be without instantaneous trip.
b. Position indicator: Provide an indicator visible from the front of the unit to indicate whether
the breaker is open or closed.
c. Trip button: Provide a mechanical trip button accessible from the front of the door to trip
the breaker.
d. Padlocking: Include provisions for padlocking the breaker in the open position.
e. Operation: Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, breakers E00 ampere frame size
and less shall be manually operated. Breakers larger than E00 amperes frame size shall
be electrically operated.
f. Trip devices shall have the following features:
1) Trip device in each pole.
2) Mechanically and electrically trip free.
3) Long time element with adjustable pick-up and selective maximum, intermediate, and
minimum time delay bands.
4) Short time element with adjustable pick-up and selective maximum, intermediate, and
minimum time delay bands.
5) Ground fault element with adjustable pick-up and selective maximum, intermediate and
minimum time delay bands. //
6) Final settings of pick-up and time bands shall be as // shown on the drawings //
reflected by the Electrical System Protective Device Study. //
E440-5
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Show breaker frame size, trip,
voltage, interrupting rating, time bands and pick-up
settings on the drawings.
2.12 FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
A. Provide UL listed and labeled molded case circuit breakers, in accordance with the NEC, as
shown on the drawings, and as herein specified.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Select the desired nonadjustable or adjustable circuit breaker paragraph below.
B.
C.
Non-adjustable Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic, trip free, non-adjustable, inverse time, and
instantaneous magnetic trips for 100 ampere frame size or less. Magnetic trip shall be
adjustable from 3X to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frame size and higher. Factory
setting shall be LOW unless otherwise noted.
2. Breaker features shall be as follows:
a. A rugged, integral housing of molded insulating material.
b. Silver alloy contacts.
c. Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each pole.
d. Quick-make, quick-break, operating mechanisms.
e. A trip element for each pole, thermal magnetic type with long time delay and
instantaneous characteristics, a common trip bar for all poles and a single operator.
f. Electrically and mechanically trip free.
g. An operating handle which indicates ON, TRIPPED and OFF positions.
h. Line and load connections shall be bolted.
i. Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum short circuit current available at the
line.
j. An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically cause all the poles of
the breaker to open. //
Adjustable Trip Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide molded case, solid state adjustable trip type circuit breakers.
2. Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as follows:
a. Ampere setting (continuous).
b. Long time band.
c. Short time trip point.
d. Short time delay.
e. Instantaneous trip point.
f. Ground fault trip point.
g. Ground fault trip delay.
3. Trip settings shall be as indicated on the drawings. Final settings shall be shown on the
electrical system protective device study.
4. Breakers, which have same rating, shall be interchangeable with each other. //
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install switchboards in accordance with the NEC as shown on the drawings and as recommended
by the manufacturer.
B. Anchor switchboards to the floor with plated with 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) minimum anchor bolts as
recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor the switchboards on two 100 mm (4 inch) minimum
channel iron sills with plated 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) bolts. Furnish sills to suit the switchboards.
Coordinate installation of sills with concrete pour of floor. Sills shall be level and grouted flush with
floor.
SPEC WRITER NOTE: Include the following paragraph
for seismic areas only.
C. Seismic bracing for switchgear shall be in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. //
E440-6
3.02 INSTRUCTIONS
Furnish the services of a competent instructor for one 4 hour period for instructing personnel in
the operation and maintenance of the switchboard on the date requested by the Resident
Engineer.
---END---
E440-7
SECTION E510
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the interior lighting systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section E010, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS,
submit the following:
B. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture (luminaire) designated on the LIGHTING FIXTURE
SCHEDULE, arranged in order of fixture designation, submit the following information.
A. Material and construction details include information on housing, optics system and
lens/diffuser.
B. Physical dimensions and description.
C. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.
D. Installation details.
E. Energy efficiency data.
F. Photometric data based on laboratory tests complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements,
testing and calculation guides.
G. Lamp data including lumen output (initial and mean), color rendition index (CRI), rated life
(hours) and color temperature (degrees Kelvin).
H. Ballast data including ballast type, starting method, ambient temperature, ballast factor, sound
rating, system watts and total harmonic distortion (THD).
C. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete
maintenance and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for
ordering replacement parts.
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated
maintenance and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Resident Engineer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)
A. Lighting Fixture Construction – General
1. Generally construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the specifications,
Regulations and Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely
at factory. Manufacturer's name, factory inspection sample and official quality label are to
be fixed to each fixture supplied.
2. Sheet Metal:
a. Shall be formed to prevent warping and sagging. Housing, trim and lens
frame shall be true, straight (unless intentionally curved) and parallel to each
other as designed.
b. Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and shall
accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage to the wiring.
c. When installed, any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame
and lens frame shall be free of light leaks; lens doors shall close in a light
tight manner.
d. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding when the
fixture is in the installed position, latches shall function easily by finger action
without the use of tools.
E510-1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3. Heat Resistance finishes, wires and components inside fixtures are to be certified
materials to resist the temperatures, or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
2
4. Wiring Inside Fixtures to be not less than 1.5 mm , and insulated to have acceptable
characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated
on screw type, fixed, insulating terminal blocks.
5. Hinges fixture with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed hinges and
catches, and stainless steel retaining clips.
6. Suspension Aligners to be provided for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and horizontal
alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.
7. Recessed Fixtures to be constructed to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting
fixture or ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
8. Outdoor Fixtures to be non-ferrous metal or specially treated material for outdoor use.
9. Removal of parts for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture housing.
Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally installed position, and shall not be
mounted to removable reflectors or wire way covers unless so specified.
Lamp Sockets:
1. Fluorescent: Lamp holder contacts shall be the biting edge type or phosphorous-bronze
with silver flash contact surface type and shall conform to the applicable requirements of
UL 542. Lamp holders for bi-pin lamps shall be of the telescoping compression type, or of
the single slot entry type requiring a one-quarter turn of the lamp after insertion.
2. High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures.
Recessed fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings.
Mechanical Safety: Lighting fixture closures (lens doors, trim frame, hinged housings, etc.) shall
be retained in a secure manner by captive screws, chains, captive hinges or fasteners such that
they cannot be accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.
Metal Finishes:
1. The manufacturer shall apply standard finish (unless otherwise specified) over a corrosion
resistant primer, after cleaning to free the metal surfaces of rust, grease, dirt and other
deposits. Edges of pre-finished sheet metal exposed during forming, stamping or
shearing processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant manner to match the
adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of stains or evidence of rusting, blistering,
or flaking, and shall be applied after fabrication.
2. Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than 85 percent reflectance,
except where otherwise shown on the drawing.
3. Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the drawings.
Lighting fixtures shall have a specific means for grounding metallic wireways and housings to an
equipment grounding conductor.
Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:
1. Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic.
2. Flat lens panels shall have not less than 1/8 inch [3.2mm] of average thickness. The
average thickness shall be determined by adding the maximum thickness to the minimum
impenetrated thickness and dividing the sum by 2.
3. Unless otherwise specified, lenses, diffusers and louvers shall be retained firmly in a
metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a manner as to allow expansion and
contraction of the lens without distortion or cracking.
Lighting fixtures in hazardous areas shall be suitable for installation in Class and Group areas as
defined in NFPA 70, and shall comply with UL 844.
Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps
with ballast integral to the fixture. Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures are
prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures (not the lamp).
Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.
2.02 BALLASTS
A. Linear Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: electronic type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11,
designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output
unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated; including the following features:
E510-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit (T5 lamps only).
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: Class A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10 percent or less.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
Ballast Factor: 0.87 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFT 18, Ch.1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic
and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.
11. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the
outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on
another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room,
each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all
fixture units that are being controlled.
12. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate
otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of
adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp
fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting.
Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize single-lamp ballast
for operation of the center lamp.
13. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5% of rated lamp
lumens.
B. Low-Frequency Linear T8 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: hybrid electronic-electromagnetic rapidstart type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps
indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output; including the following features:
1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
2. Sound Rating: Class A.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20 percent or less.
4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
5. Operating Frequency: 50 Hz.
6. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
7. Ballast Factor: 0.85 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFT 18, Ch.1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic
and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.
10. To facilitate multi-level lamp switching, lamps within fixture shall be wired with the
outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same ballast, the next inward pair on
another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room,
each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all
fixture units that are being controlled.
11. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicated, unless switching arrangements dictate
otherwise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the center lamp in pairs of
adjacent units that are mounted in a continuous row. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp
fixture shall be factory wired with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting.
Individually mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize single-lamp ballast
for operation of the center lamp.
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: electronic type, complying with UL 935 and with
ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full
light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated; including the following features:
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
E510-3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Sound Rating: Class A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 10 percent or less.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
Interference:
Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.
11. Dimming ballasts shall be as per above, except dimmable from 100% to 5 % of rated
lamp lumens.
D. Ballasts for high intensity discharge fixtures: electromagnetic ballast for high intensity discharge
lamps. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 30 deg C for single-lamp ballasts.
3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 40 deg C.
4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to
minimize audible fixture noise.
E. Electronic ballast for high intensity discharge metal-halide lamps shall include the following
features unless otherwise indicated:
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 29 deg C for single-lamp ballasts.
2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 54 deg C.
3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
4. Sound Rating: Class A.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: 20 percent or less.
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.
8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
9. Interference:
Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for non-consumer equipment.
10. Protection: Class P thermal cut.
2.03 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY BALLAST
A. Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and
compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously at an output of 1100
lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to
fixture ballast.
2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates
trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
5. Integral Self-Test: Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required
intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.
2.04 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT
A. Complete, self-contained unit with batteries, battery charger, one or more local or remote lamp
heads with lamps, under-voltage relay, and test switch. Comply with UL 924.
E510-4
1. Enclosure: Shall be impact-resistant thermoplastic, which will protect components from
dust, moisture, and oxidizing fumes from the battery. Enclosure shall be suitable for the
environmental conditions in which installed.
2. Lamp Heads: Horizontally and vertically adjustable, mounted on the face of the unit,
except where otherwise indicated.
3. Battery: Shall be maintenance-free nickel-cadmium. Minimum normal life shall be 10
years.
4. Battery Charger: Dry-type full-wave rectifier with charging rates to maintain the battery in
fully-charged condition during normal operation, and to automatically recharge the battery
within 12 hours following a 1-1/2 hour continuous discharge.
5. Integral Self-Test: Automatically initiates test of unit emergency operation at required
intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing LED.
2.05 LAMPS
A. Linear and U-shaped T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.1; and instant-start lamps shall
comply with ANSI C78.3.
2. Chromaticity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.376.
3. Except as indicated below, lamps shall be low-mercury energy saving type, have a color
temperature Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule, a Color Rendering Index (CRI) of greater
than 80, average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the
EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp
sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1.
B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:
1. T4, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule.
C.
Long Twin-Tube Fluorescent Lamps:
1. T5, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule, 20,000
hours average rated life.
D. High Intensity Discharge Lamps:
1. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature
Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
2. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature Refer to
Lighting Fixture Schedule.
3. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), and color temperature
Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule.
4. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature Refer to
Lighting Fixture Schedule
2.06 RADIO-INTERFERENCE-FREE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Shall be specially designed for suppressing radio-frequency energy produced within the fixtures.
The Rules and Regulations of FCC (CFR 47, Part 18) shall apply.
B. Lenses shall have a light-transparent layer of metal permanently bonded to them, and in positive
contact with the steel housing or equal to prevent the radio-frequency interferences from passing
through the lenses. The effective light transmittance of the lenses shall be not less than 75
percent.
C. Install line filters within the body of the fixtures and wired in series with the supply circuit
conductors to eliminate the transmission of radio frequency energy into the supply circuit.
D. Ballasts shall be as specified herein.
2.07 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 101 and UL 924.
B. Housing and Canopy:
1. Shall be made of die-cast aluminum.
2. Optional steel housing shall be a minimum 20 gauge thick or equivalent strength aluminum.
3. Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resistant, matte black or ivory white
primer.
E510-5
C.
D.
E.
F.
Door frame shall be cast or extruded aluminum, and hinged with latch.
Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.
There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtures.
Fixtures:
1. Maximum fixture wattage shall be 1 watt or less.
2. Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of 0.090 inch [2.25mm] thick,
stenciled with 6 inch [150mm] high letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fiberglass.
Lamps shall be luminous Light Emitting Diodes (LED) mounted in center of letters on red
color stable plastic or fiberglass. The LED shall be rated minimum 25 years life.
3. Double-Faced Fixtures: Provide double-faced fixtures where required or as shown on
drawings.
4. Directional Arrows: Provide directional arrows as part of the inscription panel where required
or as shown on drawings. Directional arrows shall be the "chevron-type" of similar size and
width as the letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 101.
G. Voltages: Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the
drawings or specified.
B. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
C. Fluorescent bed light fixtures shall be attached to the studs in the walls. Attachment to gypsum
board only is not acceptable.
D. Lighting Fixture Supports:
1. Shall provide support for all of the fixtures. Supports may be anchored to channels of the
ceiling construction, to the structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above
a suspended ceiling.
2. Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping.
3. Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling or partition to deflect.
4. Hardware for recessed lighting fixtures:
a. All fixture mounting devices connecting fixtures to the ceiling system or building structure
shall have a capacity for a horizontal force of 100 percent of the fixture weight and a
vertical force of 400 percent of the fixture weight.
b. Mounting devices shall clamp the fixture to the ceiling system structure (main grid runners
or fixture framing cross runners) at four points in such a manner as to resist spreading of
these supporting members. Each support point device shall utilize a screw or approved
hardware to "lock" the fixture housing to the ceiling system, restraining the fixture from
movement in any direction relative to the ceiling. The screw (size No. 10 minimum) or
approved hardware shall pass through the ceiling member (T-bar, channel or spline), or it
may extend over the inside of the flange of the channel (or spline) that faces away from
the fixture, in a manner that prevents any fixture movement.
c.
In addition to the above, the following is required for fixtures exceeding 20 pounds [9kg] in
weight.
1) Where fixtures mounted in ASTM Standard C635-69 "Intermediate" and "Heavy Duty"
ceilings and weigh between [9kg and 25kg] provide two 12 gauge safety hangers
hung slack between diagonal corners of the fixture and the building structure.
2) Where fixtures weigh over [25kg] they shall be independently supported from the
building structure by approved hangers. Two-way angular bracing of hangers shall be
provided to prevent lateral motion.
d. Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures, they must have a
carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to the
main runners.
E510-6
5. Surface mounted lighting fixtures:
a. Fixtures shall be bolted against the ceiling independent of the outlet box at four points
spaced near the corners of each unit. The bolts (or stud-clips) shall be minimum [6mm]
bolt, secured to main ceiling runners and/or secured to cross runners. Non-turning studs
may be attached to the main ceiling runners and cross runners with special non-friction
clip devices designed for the purpose, provided they bolt through the runner, or are also
secured to the building structure by 12 gauge safety hangers. Studs or bolts securing
fixtures weighing in excess of [25kg] shall be supported directly from the building
structure.
b. Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting fixtures they must have a
carrying capacity equal to that of the main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to the
main runners.
c. Fixtures less than [6.8kg] in weight and occupying less than two square feet [600mm x
600mm] of ceiling area may, (when designed for the purpose) be supported directly from
the outlet box when all the following conditions are met.
1) Screws attaching the fixture to the outlet box pass through round holes (not key-hole
slots) in the fixture body.
2) The outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner (or cross runner) with approved
hardware.
3) The outlet box is supported vertically from the building structure.
d. Fixtures mounted in open construction shall be secured directly to the building structure
with approved bolting and clamping devices.
6. Single or double pendant-mounted lighting fixtures:
a. Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet box, mounted swivel joint and
canopy which holds the stem captive and provides spring load (or approved equivalent)
dampening of fixture oscillations. Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the building
structure.
7. Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted) shall be secured directly to the
building structure with approved devices or supported vertically in a hung ceiling from the
building structure with a nine gauge wire hanger, and be secured by an approved device to a
main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any horizontal movement relative to the ceiling.
E. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting fixtures installed and all existing lighting
fixtures reinstalled under this project.
F. Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trades to ascertain that approved lighting fixtures are
furnished in the proper sizes and installed with the proper devices (hangers, clips, trim frames,
flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.
G. Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as specified in Section
E 450 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.
H. Exercise electronic dimming ballasts over full range of dimming capability by operating the control
devices(s) in the presence of the Resident Engineer. Observe for visually detectable flicker over full
dimming range.
I. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by owner.
Burn-in period to be 40 hours minimum, unless a lesser period is specifically recommended by lamp
manufacturer. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least
100 hours at full voltage. Replace any lamps and ballasts which fail during burn-in.
J. At completion of project, relamp/reballast fixtures which have failed lamps/ballasts. Clean fixtures,
lenses, diffusers and louvers that have accumulated dust/dirt/fingerprints during construction.
Replace damaged lenses, diffusers and louvers with new.
---END---
E510-7
SECTION E560
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of exterior luminaires, poles, and
supports.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section E010, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND
REQUIREMENTS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Clearly present sufficient information to determine compliance with drawings and
specifications.
2. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, details, materials, required clearances,
terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, poles, luminaires,
lamps, and accessories.
C. Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of operating and maintenance
manuals to the Resident Engineer. Include technical data sheets, wiring and connection
diagrams, and information for ordering replacement lamps, ballasts, and parts.
D. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following to the
Resident Engineer:
1. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials are in accordance with the drawings and
specifications.
2. Certification by the contractor that the complete installation has been properly installed and
tested.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard provisions for protecting pole finishes during transport, storage,
and installation. Do not store poles on ground. Store poles so they are at least 12 in [305 mm]
above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until
just before installing pole.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, and as shown on the
drawings and specified.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Per UL 1598 and NEMA C136.17. Luminaires shall be weatherproof, heavy duty, outdoor types
designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat, and safe
cleaning and relamping.
B. Light distribution pattern types shall be as shown on the drawings.
C. Incorporate ballasts in the luminaire housing, except where otherwise shown on the drawings.
D. Lenses shall be frame-mounted, heat-resistant, borosilicate glass, with prismatic refractors,
unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Attach the frame to the luminaire housing by hinges or
chain. Use heat and aging-resistant, resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in
luminaire doors.
E560-1
E. Lamp sockets for high intensity discharge (H.I.D) fixture shall have locking-type porcelain
enclosures in conformance to the applicable requirements of ANSI C81.61 and UL 496.
F. Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory.
G. Bracket-mounted luminaires shall have leveling provisions and clamp-type adjustable slip-fitters
with locking screws.
H. Materials shall be rustproof. Latches and fittings shall be non-ferrous metal.
I. Provide manufacturer's standard finish, as scheduled on the drawings. Where indicated on
drawings, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. Where indicated on
drawings, provide finishes as indicated in Section 09 06 00, SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES.
J. Luminaires shall carry factory labels, showing complete, specific lamp and ballast information.
2.03 LAMPS
A. Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed and every existing luminaire relocated or
reinstalled.
B. Lamps shall be general-service, outdoor lighting types.
C. High-Pressure Sodium (HPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), wattage as indicated.
Lamps shall have minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours.
D. Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS) Lamps: NEMA C78.43.
E. Metal-Halide Lamps: NEMA C78.43 or NEMA C78.1381.
F. Mercury vapor lamps shall not be used.
2.04 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS
A. Per NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Ballasts shall be encapsulated single-lamp, copper-wound,
constant-wattage autotransformer type, designed to operate on the voltage system to which they
are connected and capable of open-circuit operation without reducing lamp life.
B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply conductor.
C. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variation of ±10%, with a maximum 20% lamp
wattage regulation spread.
D. Power factor shall be not less than 90%.
E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -30˚ C, and a normal ambient operating
temperature of 40˚ C.
F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer
recommendations.
2.05 METAL HALIDE CORE AND COIL BALLASTS
A. Shall be pulse start, linear reactor type for 277 volt luminaires and constant-wattage
autotransformer (CWA) type for other voltage luminaires (if not otherwise specified).
B. Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection in each ungrounded supply conductor.
C. Power factor shall be not less than 90%.
D. Ballast shall have an allowable line voltage variation of ±5% for linear reactor type and ±10% for
CWA, with a maximum 20% lamp wattage regulation spread.
E. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of –40˚ C.
F. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.8 or less, in accordance with lamp manufacturer
recommendations.
2.06 METAL HALIDE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS
A. Ballast shall be low-frequency electronic type, and shall operate pulse start and ceramic metal
halide lamps at a frequency of 90 to 200 Hz square wave.
B. Ballast shall be labeled Type ‘1’ outdoor, suitable for recessed use, Class ‘P’.
C. Ballast shall have auto-resetting thermal protector to shut off ballast when operating temperatures
reach unacceptable levels.
D. Ballast shall have an end of lamp life detection and shut-down circuit.
E. Lamp current crest factor shall be 1.5 or less.
F. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards.
G. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor of 1.0.
E560-2
H.
I.
J.
K.
Input current THD shall not exceed 20% for the primary lamp.
Ballasts shall have ANSI C62.41, category ‘A’ transient protection.
Ballasts shall have power factor greater than 90%.
Ballast shall have a Class ‘A’ sound rating.
2.07 EXISTING LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A. For modifications or additions to existing lighting systems, the new components shall be
compatible with the existing systems.
B. New poles and luminaires shall have approximately the same configurations and dimensions as
the existing poles and luminaires, except where otherwise shown on the drawings.
//2.08 SERIES LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A. Series-Type Systems:
1. Provide components specifically for constant-current series type lighting systems.
2. Constant-Current Transformers:
a. Self-cooled by natural convection, liquid-immersed, fully automatic, outdoor type.
b. Liquid shall be oil, conforming to ASTM D3487, except where otherwise shown.
c. Temperature rises shall not exceed the following test values for the respective insulation
systems:
1) Standard, 131˚ F [55˚ C] by resistance and 149˚ F [65˚ C] hottest spot.
2) Thermally upgraded, 149˚ F [65˚ C] by resistance and 180˚ F [80˚ C] hottest spot.
d. Core Coil Assemblies:
1) Braced to withstand the stresses caused by the maximum current possible under all
conditions and rough handling during shipment.
2) Cores, silicon steel.
3) Coils, continuous windings without splices, except for taps.
e. Bring primary and secondary leads out through wet-process, porcelain bushings,
pressure-tight. Terminals shall be suitable for the specific cables being connected to
them.
f. Series-type systems shall have capacitors for power factor improvement. The value of
power factor under the percent of full load rating shall be as shown on the drawings.
g. Series-type systems shall regulate the secondary current within 1% over the entire load
rating range while the primary voltage remains within 5% of the rated voltage.
h. Operation of the transformers shall not be adversely affected while the transformers are
mounted five degrees off of perpendicular.
i. Provide tanks and covers of steel to meet NEMA and ANSI requirements, cleaned,
phosphatized, and painted at the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard
extremely durable finish.
j. Sound levels shall not exceed 45 db.
k. Standard ANSI features and accessories including a pressure relief device, ground pad,
lifting provisions, and diagrammatic nameplate.
l. Dimensions and configurations shall conform to the spaces designated for installations.
m. Install the transformers such that they will have adequate air circulation for heat removal.
3. Controllers:
a. Oil-immersed, rated-load-interrupter, outdoor type, with heavy duty, silver-alloy contacts.
b. Oil, ASTM D3487.
c. Operate at 120 V, 60 Hz.
d. Have an auxiliary hand lever for manual operation during emergencies.
e. The depth below the oil surface of the contacts shall be not less than the depth of the
switch mechanism.
f. Bring leads out through wet-process, porcelain bushings, pressure-tight. Terminals shall
be suitable for the specific cables being connected to them.
g. Provide steel tanks and covers, thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized, and painted at the
factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard durable finish.
E560-3
h. Dimensions and configurations shall conform to the spaces designed for installations.
4. Provide protective relays to de-energize the control circuits for the controllers, thereby deenergizing the series lighting load circuits when open circuit faults occur in the series lighting
load circuits.
5. Transformer, equipment enclosure, lightning arresters, and primary and secondary protection
shall be provided.
6. Disconnecting devices shall be watertight, submersible type, suitable for the cables being
installed and for use in outdoor lighting systems.//
//2.09 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING
A. Refer to Section 26 09 23, LIGHTING CONTROLS for control devices.
B. For Buildings:
1. Luminaires shall comply with FAA, AC 70/7460-1K, and AC 150/5345-43E, and be Type L1810 duplex units with red Fresnel lenses and 100 W, type A-21, clear, traffic-signal lamps.
2. Mount the luminaires on galvanized rigid steel pipe masts attached to the roof of the buildings
so the luminaires extend 12 in [305 mm] above the level of the highest item on the building,
including items attached to the roof.
3. Locate luminaires in accordance with the applicable FAA Standards.
C. For Smoke Stacks: Luminaires shall be in accordance with the referenced details shown on the
drawings. All lamps shall be the type shown on the drawings.
D. For Water Tanks and Cooling Towers: Luminaires shall be FAA, AC 70/7460-1K, and AC
150/5345-43E, Type L-810 duplex units with red Fresnel lenses and 100 W, type A-21, clear,
traffic-signal lamps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting in accordance with the NEC, as shown on the drawings, and in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Install lamps in each luminaire.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment, including metal poles, luminaires, mounting arms,
brackets, and metallic enclosures, as specified in Section 26 05 26, GROUNDING AND
BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a
metal other than copper, provides specially-treated or lined connectors suitable and listed for this
purpose
.
3.03 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS
A. Verify operation after installing luminaires and energizing circuits.
---END---
E560-4
SECTION E520
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation and connection of the lighting controls.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section E010, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS,
submit the following:
B. Product Data: For each type of lighting control, submit the following information.
1. Manufacturer’s catalog data.
2. Wiring schematic and connection diagram.
3. Installation details.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of complete maintenance
and operating manuals including technical data sheets, and information for ordering
replacement parts.
2. Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of the final updated maintenance
and operating manuals, including any changes, to the Resident Engineer.
D. Certifications:
1. Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four copies of the following certifications to the
Resident Engineer:
a. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted,
and tested.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRONIC TIME SWITCHES
A. Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.
1. Contact Configuration: //SPST// //DPST// //DPDT//.
2. Contact Rating: //30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac// //20-A ballast load, 120/240-V ac//.
3. Astronomical Clock: Capable of switching a load on at sunset and off at sunrise, and
automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset
and sunrise. Additionally, it shall be programmable to a fixed on/off weekly schedule.
4. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.
2.02 ELECTROMECHANICAL-DIAL TIME SWITCHES
A. Electromechanical-dial time switches; complying with UL 917.
1. Contact Configuration: //SPST// //DPST// //DPDT//.
2. Contact Rating: //30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac// //20-A ballast load, 120/240-V ac//.
3. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures.
2.03 TIMER SWITCHES
A. Digital switches with backlit LCD display, 120/277 volt rated, fitting as a replacement for standard
wall switches.
1. Compatibility: Compatible with all ballasts.
2. Warning: Audible warning to sound during the last minute of “on” operation.
3. Time-out: Adjustable from 5 minutes to 12 hours.
4. Faceplate: Refer to wall plate material and color requirements for toggle switches, as
specified in Section E140, WIRING ACCESSORIES.
E570-1
2.04 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a power supply and relay unit, suitable for the
environmental conditions in which installed.
1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off
when unoccupied; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights off.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay. Sensor shall be powered
from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten at
120V, and for 1 hp at 120V.
4. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of
the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Manual/automatic selector switch.
8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 21.5 to 2152 lx; keep lighting off when
selected lighting level is present.
9. Faceplate for Wall-Switch Replacement Type: Refer to wall plate material and color
requirements for toggle switches, as specified in Section E140, WIRING ACCESSORIES.
B. Dual-technology Type: Ceiling mounting; combination PIR and ultrasonic detection methods,
field-selectable.
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 150mm minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 232 sq. cm, and detect a person of
average size and weight moving not less than 305 mm in either a horizontal or a vertical
manner at an approximate speed of 305 mm/s.
3. Detection Coverage: as scheduled on drawings.
2.05 OUTDOOR MOTION SENSOR (PIR)
A. Suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 54 deg C.
1. Operation: Turn lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background and
moving body in area of coverage; with a 1 to 15 minute adjustable time delay for turning lights
off.
2. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outdoor junction box.
b. Relay: Internally mounted in a standard weatherproof electrical enclosure.
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
3. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
4. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 11 to 215 lx; keep lighting off during daylight
hours.
B. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 150mm minimum movement of any portion of a
human body that presents a target of not less than 232 sq. cm.
C. Detection Coverage: as scheduled on drawings.
D. Individually Mounted Sensor: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with
UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
1. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V, for 13A tungsten at
120V, and for 1 hp at 120V.
2. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
2.06 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL – RELAY TYPE
A. Controller: Comply with UL 508; programmable, solid-state, astronomic 365-day control unit
with non-volatile memory, mounted in preassembled relay panel with low-voltage-controlled,
latching-type, single-pole lighting circuit relays.
Controller shall be capable of receiving
E570-2
B.
C.
D.
E.
inputs from sensors and other sources, and capable of timed overrides and/or blink-warning
on a per-circuit basis. Controller communication protocol shall be compatible with the building
automation system specified in SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
FOR HVAC. Where indicated, a limited number of digital or analog, low-voltage control-circuit
outputs shall be supported by control unit and circuit boards associated with relays.
Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door. Barriers separate low-voltage and line-voltage
components.
Directory: Identifies each relay as to load controlled.
Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc output.
Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil, momentarypulsed type, rated 20 A, 125-V ac for tungsten filaments and 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts,
50,000 cycles at rated capacity.
2.07 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL – CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
A. Controller: Panelboard mounted in compliance with UL 916, programmable, solid-state,
astronomic 365-day timing and control unit with non-volatile memory. Controller shall be
integral to panelboard as specified in Section E450, PANELBOARDS. Controller shall be
capable of receiving inputs from sensors and other sources, and capable of timed overrides
and/or blink-warning on a per-circuit basis. Controller communication protocol shall be
compatible with the building automation system specified in SECTION 23 09 23, DIRECTDIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC. Panelboard shall use low-voltage-controlled,
electrically operated molded-case branch circuit breakers or molded-case branch circuit
breakers with switching accessories. Circuit breakers and a limited number of digital or
analog, low-voltage control-circuit outputs shall be individually controlled by control module.
Panelboard shall also comply with Section E450, PANELBOARDS.
B. Electrically Operated, Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Panelboard: Per Section E450,
PANELBOARDS.
C. Electrically Operated, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Per Section E450, PANELBOARDS.
D. Switching Endurance Ratings: Rated at least 20,000 open and close operations under rated
load at 0.8 power factor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the
drawings or specified.
B. Aim outdoor photocell switch according to manufacturer's recommendations. Set adjustable
window slide for 1 footcandle photocell turn-on.
C. Aiming for wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted motion sensor switches shall be per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
D. Set occupancy sensor "on" duration to //5// //10// //15// minutes.
E. Locate light level sensors as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Adjust sensor for the scheduled light level at the typical work plane for that
area.
F. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE CHECKS AND TESTS
A. Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Upon completion of installation, conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in
accordance with requirements of this section.
C. Test for full range of dimming ballast and dimming controls capability. Observe for visually
detectable flicker over full dimming range.
D. Test occupancy sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire area being
covered.
E. Program lighting control panels per schedule on drawings.
E570-3
---END---
E570-4
11-09
SECTION E611
INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and install a complete Intrusion Detection System, hereinafter referred to as IDS, as
specified in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, and the operation of the IDS as
shown. The Contractor shall also provide certification as required.
B. The security system shall be installed and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as
a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the security
system is stand-alone or a part of a complete Information Technology (IT) computer network.
C. The Contractor or security sub-contractor shall be a licensed security Contractor as required
within the state or jurisdiction of where the installation work is being conducted.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit below items in conjunction with Master Specifications, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT
DATA, AND SAMPLES, and DEMOLITION.
B. Provide certificates of compliance with Section 1.02, Quality Assurance.
C. Provide a pre-installation and as-built design package in both electronic format and on paper,
minimum size 48 x 48 inches (1220 x 1220 millimeters); drawing submittals shall be per the
established project schedule.
D. Pre-installation design and as-built packages shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Index Sheet that shall:
a. Define each page of the design package to include facility name, building name, floor,
and sheet number.
b. Provide a list of all security abbreviations and symbols.
c. Reference all general notes that are utilized within the design package.
d. Specification and scope of work pages for all security systems that are applicable to the
design package that will:
1) Outline all general and job specific work required within the design package.
2) Provide a device identification table outlining device Identification (ID) and use for all
security systems equipment utilized in the design package.
2. Drawing sheets that will be plotted on the individual floor plans or site plans shall:
a. Include a title block as defined above.
b. Define the drawings scale in both standard and metric measurements.
c. Provide device identification and location.
d. Address all signal and power conduit runs and sizes that are associated with the design
of the electronic security system and other security elements (e.g., barriers, etc.).
e. Identify all pull box and conduit locations, sizes, and fill capacities.
f. Address all general and drawing specific notes for a particular drawing sheet.
3. A riser drawing for each applicable security subsystem shall:
a. Indicate the sequence of operation.
b. Relationship of integrated components on one diagram.
C. Include the number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires.
d. Wire/cable types shall be defined by a wire and cable schedule. The schedule shall utilize
a lettering system that will correspond to the wire/cable it represents (example: A = 18
AWG/1 Pair Twisted, Unshielded). This schedule shall also provide the manufacturer’s
name and part number for the wire/cable being installed.
4. A system drawing for each applicable security system shall:
a. Identify how all equipment within the system, from main panel to device, shall be laid out
and connected.
b. Provide full detail of all system components wiring from point-to-point.
E611-1
11-09
c.
Identify wire types utilized for connection, interconnection with associate security
subsystems.
d. Show device locations that correspond to the floor plans.
e. All general and drawing specific notes shall be included with the system drawings.
5. A schedule for all of the applicable security subsystems shall be included. All schedules shall
provide the following information:
a. Device ID.
b. Device Location (e.g. site, building, floor, room number, location, and description).
c. Mounting type (e.g. flush, wall, surface, etc.).
d. Power supply or circuit breaker and power panel number.
e. In addition, for the IDS, provide the sensor ID, sensor type and housing model number.
6. Detail and elevation drawings for all devices that define how they were installed and
mounted.
E. Pre-installation design packages shall be reviewed by the Contractor along with a VA
representative to ensure all work has been clearly defined and completed. All reviews shall be
conducted in accordance with the project schedule. There shall be four (4) stages to the review
process:
1. 35 percent
2. 65 percent
3. 90 percent
4. 100 percent
F. Provide manufacturer security system product cut-sheets. Submit for approval at least 30 days
prior to commencement of formal testing, a Security System Operational Test Plan. Include
procedures for operational testing of each component and security subsystem, to include
performance of an integrated system test.
G. Submit manufacture’s certification of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listing as specified.
Provide all maintenance and operating manuals.
1.04 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. The publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplement, and
errata) form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced
in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Security Industry Association (SIA):
PIR-01-00 ................................... Passive Infrared Motion Detector Standard - Features for
Enhancing False Alarm Immunity
CP-01-00 ................................... Control Panel Standard-Features for False Alarm Reduction
C. Department of Justice American Disability Act (ADA)
28 CFR Part 36-90 ..................... ADA Standards for Accessible Design
D. National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA):
250-03 ........................................ Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
70-05 .......................................... National Electrical Code
731-06 ........................................ Standards for the Installation of Electric Premises Security
Systems
F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
464-03 ........................................ Audible Signal Appliances
609-96 ........................................ Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
634-00 ........................................ Standards for Connectors with Burglar-Alarm Systems
639-97 ........................................ Standards for Intrusion Detection Units
1037-99 ...................................... Standard for Anti-theft Alarms and Devices
1635-96 ...................................... Digital Alarm Communicator System Units
G. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1984
1.05 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION.
A. Warrant IDS work subject to the Article “Warranty of Construction” of FAR 52.246-21.
E611-2
11-09
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. General
1. All equipment associated within the IDS shall be rated for continuous operation.
Environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, wind, and seismic activity) shall be
taken under consideration at each facility and site location prior to installation of the
equipment.
2. All equipment shall operate on a 120 or 240 volts alternating current (VAC); 50 Hz or 60 Hz
AC power system unless documented otherwise in subsequent sections listed within this
specification. All equipment shall have a back-up source of power that will provide a minimum
of 96 hours of run time in the event of a loss of primary power to the facility.
3. The system shall be designed, installed, and programmed in a manner that will allow for ease
of operation, programming, servicing, maintenance, testing, and upgrading of the system.
4. All IDS components located in designated “HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENT” areas where fire
or explosion could occur due to the presence of natural gases or vapors, flammable liquids,
combustible residue, or ignitable fibers or debris, shall be rated Class II, Division I, Group F,
and installed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 National
Electric Code, Chapter 5.
5. All equipment and materials for the system will be compatible to ensure functional operation
in accordance with requirements.
2.02 EQUIPMENT ITEMS
A. General:
1. All requirements listed below are the minimum specifications that need to be met in order to
comply with the IDS.
2. All IDS sensors shall conform to UL 639, Intrusion Detection Standard.
3. Ensure that IDS is fully integrated with other security subsystems as required to include, but
not limited to, the CCTV, PACS, EPPS, and Access Control System and Database
Management. The IDS provided shall not limit the expansion and growth capability to a single
manufacturer and shall allow modular expansion with minimal equipment modifications.
B. IDS Components: The IDS shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following components:
1. Control Panel
2. Exterior Detection Devices (Sensors)
3. Interior Detection Devices (Sensors)
4. Power Supply
5. Enclosures
C. Control Panel:
1. The Control panel shall be the main point of programming, monitoring, accessing, securing,
and troubleshooting the IDS. Refer to American National Standards Institute (ANSI) CP-01
Control Panel Standard-Features for False Alarm Reduction.
2. The Control Panel shall provide a means of reporting alarms to an Access Control System
and Database Management via a computer interface or direct connection to an alarm control
monitoring panel.
3. The Control panel shall utilize a Multifunctional Keypad, Input and Output Modules for
expansion of alarm zones, interfacing with additional security subsystems, programming,
monitoring and controlling the IDS.
4. The Control panel shall meet or exceed the following minimum functional requirements for
programming outputs, system response, and user interface:
a. Programming Outputs:
1) 2 Amps (A) alarm power at 12 VDC
2) 1.4 A auxiliary power at 12 VDC
3) Four alarm output patterns
4) Programmable bell test
5) Programmable bell shut-off timer
E611-3
11-09
b. System Response:
1) Selectable point response time
2) Cross point capability
3) larm verification
4) Watch mode
5) Scheduled events arm, disarm, bypass and un-bypass points, control relays, and
control authority levels
c. User Interface:
1) Supervises up to eight command points (e.g. Up to 16 unsupervised keypads can be
used)
2) Provides custom keypad text
3) Addresses full function command menu including custom functions
4) Allows user authority by defined area and 16-character name
5) Provides for 14 custom authority control levels allowing user’s authority to change,
add, delete pass codes, disarm, bypass points, and start system tests.
5. The Control panel shall meet or exceed the following technical characteristics:
Input Voltage via 110 VAC or 220 VAC Step-down 16 or 18 VAC
Transformer
Operating Voltage
12 VDC
Output Voltage
12 VDC @ 2 A max
Direct Hardwire Zones
7
Partitions
8
Multifunctional Keypads
16 (2 per partition)
Communications Port
RJ-11
6. A multifunctional keypad shall be utilized as a user interface for arming, disarming,
monitoring, troubleshooting, and programming the alarm control panel.
7. Keypads shall have the following features:
a. Multiple function keypads suitable for remote mounting, no greater than 4000 ft (1333 m),
shall be provided from the control panel and have a light emitting diode (LED) readout of
alarm and trouble conditions by zone.
b. An alphanumeric English language display, with keypad programmability, and EE-PROM
memory, shall also be provided.
c. Trouble alarm indicators shall be distinguishable from intrusion alarms.
d. A minimum of four (4) zones selectable as entry and exit with programmable time delay.
e. Complete system test activated capability at the keypad.
f. Capability for opening and closing reports to a remote monitoring location.
g. Adjustable entry and exit delay times.
h. Capability for a minimum of two (2) multiple function keypads.
i. Capability to shunt or bypass selected interior zones while arming perimeter protection
and remaining interior zones.
j. Capability for a minimum of seven assignable pass-codes that are keypad programmable
from a suppressed master code.
8. Keypads shall meet or exceed the following technical characteristics:
Connections
4-wire flying lead for data and power
Operating Temperature
0°C to +50°C (+32°F to +122°F)
Display Window
8-point LED
Indicators: Illuminated keys
Armed Status-LED
Point Status-LED
E611-4
11-09
Command Mode-LED
Power-LED
Voltage
Nominal 12 VDC
9. An input module shall be utilized to connect additional detection devices to the control panel.
This module will meet or exceed the following technical characteristics:
Operating Voltage
8.5 to 14.5 VDC Nominal
Zone Inputs
Style A (Class B) Supervised
Operating Temperature
32 to 140 degrees F (0 to 40 degrees C)
10.
An output module shall be utilized to interface the control panel with other security
subsystems. The output module shall meet or exceed the following technical characteristics:
Operating Voltage
8.5 to 14.5 VDC Nominal
Output Relays
“Form C” Dry Relay Contracts
Relay Contact Rating
4A @ 24 VDC
4A @ 24 VAC
1A @ 70 VAC
Operating Temperature
32 to 140 degrees F (0 to 40 degrees C)
11.
The control panel shall have a communications port that will allow for communications with a
computer for programming, monitoring, and troubleshooting purposes. The communications
port will be, at a minimum, and RJ-11 or better.
12. The control panel will have a systems success probability of 95% or better, and shall include
the following success considerations:
a. False Alarm: Shall not exceed one (1) false alarm per 30 days per sensor zone.
b. Nuisance Alarm: Shall not exceed a rate of one (1) alarm per seven (7) days per zone
within the first 60 days after installation and acceptance. Sensor adjustments will be
made and then shall not exceed one (1) alarm per 30 days.
13. The Control Panel will be able to detect either a line fault or power loss for all supervised data
cables.
a. Line Fault Detection: Communication links of the IDS shall have an active mode for line
fault detection. Fault isolation at the systems level shall have the same geographic
resolutions as provided for intrusion detection. The line fault alarm shall be clearly
distinguishable from other alarms.
b. Power Loss Detection: Provide the capability to detect when critical components
experience temporary or permanent loss of power and annunciate to clearly identify the
component experiencing power loss.
D. Exterior Detection Devices: (Sensors)
1. The IDS shall consist of interior, exterior, and other detection devices that are capable of:
a. Locating intrusions at individually protected asset areas or at an individual portal;
b. Locating intrusions within a specific area of coverage;
c. Locating failures or tampering of individual sensors or components.
2. Audible annunciation shall meet UL 464 Audible Signal Appliance requirements as well as
other stated within this specification. IDS shall provide and adjust for devices so that
coverage is maximized in the space or area it is installed in. For large areas where multiple
devices are required, ensure exterior device coverage is overlapping.
3. Detection sensitivity shall be set up to ensure maximum coverage of the secure area is
obtained while at the same time limiting excessive false alarms due to the environment and
E611-5
11-09
impact of small animals. All detection devices shall be anti-masking with exception of video
motion detection.
4. Dual sensor technology shall be used when possible. Sensor technology shall not be of the
same type that is easily defeated by a single method. This will reduce the amount of false
alarms.
5. Exterior sensors described in this section are intended for outdoor use for perimeter and
fence control monitoring purposes. Some sensors described in the interior sensor section
may be utilized that can provide both outdoor and indoor protection.
6. External Sensors Environmental Characteristics:
Temperature
-25°F - 140°F (-32°C - 60°C)
Pressure
Sea Level to 15,000 ft. (4573m) above sea level
Solar Radiation
Six (6) hrs. exposure at dry bulb temp. 120°F (60°C)
Rain
Two (2) in. (50 mm) per hour
Humidity
5% - 95%
Fungus
Components of non-fungus nutrient materials
Salt/fog
Atmosphere 5% salinity
Snow loading
48 lbs per sq. ft. (234 kg per sq. meter)
Ice accumulation
Up to ½ in. (12.7 mm) radial ice
Wind limitations
50 mph (80 km/h)
Gusts to 66 mph (106 km/h)
Acoustical
Suitability
Noise
> 110 decibels (dB)
7. Electromechanical Fence Sensors: Shall sense mechanical vibrations or motion associated
with scaling, cutting, or attempting to lift standard security chain link fence as follows: Note:
Dead zones shall not exist from a monitoring and alarm coverage perspective.
a. The sensor zone control unit shall alarm when a sufficient number of sensing unit
activations surface within a specified time period.
b. Individual sensing units and the alarm thresholds shall be field adjustable (i.e., performed
by an authorized technician or trained maintenance personnel). Midrange sensitivity
settings shall alarm a sensor when an intruder attempts to scale or climb the fence in
areas of reduced sensitivity (e.g. around poles and rigid supports, etc.) and attempted
lifting or scaling of a fence, including using assisted methods (e.g. items leaned against
the fence, etc.)occur. Sensors shall allow gradual changes in fence positioning due to
expansion, settling, and aging, without increased numbers of nuisance alarms taking
place.
c. Exterior sensor components shall be housed in rugged, corrosion-resistant enclosures,
protected from environmental impact and degradation.
d. Fence cable support hardware shall be weather-resistant. Interfacing between sensor
zones and alarm enunciators, require they be installed in underground conduit and
cables.
e. Fencing Cable Technical Characteristics:
Input voltage
12-30 V DC
Current requirement
4 mA quiescent
25 mA (max) in alarm
Transient suppression
On data, power input lines and on
E611-6
11-09
relay output
Enclosure
Weatherproof
Sensor type
Inertial band-pass-filter
Transponder
4 zone controller
Output relays for dry contacts, or
RS-485 communication
Inputs for weather sensor
Sensor spacing
8.2 to 9.9 ft. (2.5 to 3 m)
Data I/O
RS 485 communications
Data output
• Vibration alarm (in either line)
• Line alarm (in either line)
• End of line action
• Wind situation
• Weather sensor line failure
• Enclosure tamper switch
• Program fail
• A dry contact output with end of line resistor per each of
4 vibration inputs
8. Strain-Sensitive Cable Sensors: These devices shall detect movement on a standard security
chain link fence associated with an intruder scaling, cutting through, or attempting to lift the
fence fabric. The entire sensor system shall be mounted directly on the fence and able to
withstand the same environmental condition exposures. Note: The length of the fence shall
also maintain no sensor monitoring dead zones.
a. Individual sensing units and the alarm threshold shall be field adjustable (i.e. by
authorized technicians or trained maintenance personnel) for compensation of winds up
to 25 mph (40 km/h) or by zone without increased nuisance alarms while maintaining
specified sensor performance as under ambient conditions.
b. Sensor zone control units shall provide an analog audio output for interface to an external
audio amplifier to permit remote audio assessment regardless of sensor alarm status.
The sensor zone control unit alarm output interface shall be a separately supervised relay
contact normally open or normally closed.
c. The length of the fence shall be divided into 300 ft. (100 m) zones.
d. The sensing unit shall consist of transducer cable capable of achieving specified
performance either by attachment directly to the fence fabric by plastic cable every 12 to
18 in. (300 to 455 mm) or by installation inside electrical metallic tubing conduit mounted
on the fence.
e. The sensing unit shall have equal adjustable sensitivity throughout the entire fence
length. Only conventional waterproof coaxial cable connectors shall be used for
connections of the sensing unit to avoid electrical magnetic interference.
f. The entire sensor system shall be tamper resistant and capable of detecting tampering
within each portion of the system by sensor zone.
g. Magnetic Sensor Cable Technical Characteristics:
Magnetic Sensor Cable
Type cable
Four (4) conductor magnetically loaded, aluminum foil
E611-7
11-09
shield and ground wire
Maximum zone length
1000 ft. (300 m)
Life expectancy
10 years
Sensitivity
Uniform over length of cable
Audio Bandwidth
Five (5) kHz
Outer Cover
Black Polyurethane, Ultraviolet resistant
Insensitive
processing)
Cable
(remote
Type cable
2 twisted pair, individually sealed
Outer Cover
Black Polyurethane, Ultraviolet resistant
Dual Channel Signal Processor
Input Power
10.2 – 13.8 VDC 65 mA
Alarm Output
Alarm contacts SPNC 0.75 mA, 200 VDC
Indicators
Three (3):Alarm, tamper, events
Cut processor
Sensitivity - 10 settings
Time window – 0.5 – 4.5 min
Event Counter – nine (9)
Climb processor
Sensitivity – 10 settings
9. Buried Electromagnetic Cable Sensor:
a. The system shall be able to function as a standalone system or as an integral component
of a centralized security control system.
b. The detection field shall be formed by radio-frequency (RF) signals carried by sensor
cables that are buried along the perimeter.
c. The RF signals shall form an invisible electromagnetic detection field around the sensor
cables that can detect the presence of an intruder passing through the field.
d. The system shall detect moving intruders that have a significant electromagnetic field
(e.g. humans, vehicles, and other large conductive objects) while rejecting other
environmental stimuli such as birds, small animals, weather elements.
e. A sensor module shall contain the electronics required to:
1) Transmit and receive the RF signal without the use of an external antenna.
2) Monitor the detection fields of two (2) zones and produce an alarm when an intruder
enters the zones.
f. Field power modules shall be available for standalone systems and networked systems.
g. As a standalone system, the primary operator interface shall be a local interface module
that is connected directly to the sensor module.
h. As part of a network configuration, the primary operator interface shall be a personal
computer (PC) based central controller. The central controller shall monitor the
performance of the entire buried coaxial cable outdoor intrusion detection system and
any auxiliary sensors. The central controller shall have the capability of acknowledging,
processing and reporting alarms. A customized color site map that is displayed on the PC
monitor shall be an available option for the system to monitor sensor locations.
i. Transmission and reception shall be accomplished without the use of antennae. The RF
signal shall be monitored and analyzed by the sensor module for any changes in the
detection field properties that would indicate the presence of an intruder.
E611-8
11-09
j.
Alarms generated by internal electronic processes (cables excluded) shall not exceed
one (1) per zone per month. System generated alarms are averaged based on the total
number of zones in the system.
k. When the system is calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations,
the detection field shall be continuous and uniform over the protected site perimeter.
l. When system sensitivity is calibrated according to manufacturers' recommendations, the
detection field shall not detect a valid target that is a minimum of 6.5 ft. (2 m) from the
nearest sensor cable.
m. Buried Electromagnetic Cable Sensor Technical Characteristics:
Burial Medium
Clay, sand, soil, asphalt, concrete
Snow limitation
Up to 1 ft. (30cm) deep
Degradation Guaranty
Minimum 10 yr.
Detection Medium
Radio Frequency (RF)
Detection Coverage
Maximum 656 ft. (200m) per zone
Detection Capability
Human: >75 lbs. (34 kg)
Detection Speed
Human walk, crawl, run, roll, jump
1 in./sec. (2.5 cm/sec) – 50 ft./sec.
(15 m/sec. regardless of direction across field
Velocity Response
Programmable
Detection Probability
Human: 99% with 95% confidence factor
Animal: Less than 22 lbs. (10 kg.)
Less than 5% with 90% confidence factor
Terrain
Capabilities
Detection
Even to uneven ground with maximum (max)
grade 13 ft. (4 m)
Corner bend radius 22 ft. (6.5m)
Detection
Section
Field
Cross
Upright walking;
Height: 3.2 ft. (1m) above ground
Width: 6.5 ft. (2m) single cable
9.75 ft. (3m) double cable
Sensing Element
Ported (leaky) coaxial cables
Cable Construction
Abrasion and chemical resistant, high density
polyethylene, with flooding compound
Cable Requirements
Two (2):Transmit cable, receive cable
Configurations Available
Two (2):Single cable, double cable
Cable Lengths
164 ft. (50 m), 328 ft. (100 m),
492 ft. (150 m), 656 ft. (200 m)
Zone Length Minimum
33 ft. (10 m)
Antenna Requirements
None
False alarm rate
Less than one (1) per day
E611-9
11-09
n. Sensor Module:
Each sensor module shall transmit, receive and process the
electromagnetic detection fields independently from other sensor modules. Failure of one
(1) sensor module shall not affect the remainder of the perimeter. The sensor module
shall operate as either a standalone unit, or in a network configuration in conjunction with
a central controller. The sensor module shall be mounted in a weatherproof enclosure
when installed outdoors as follows.
1) The sensor module shall use an adaptive filter to analyze the detection signal and
adjust the signal processing to reduce nuisance alarms caused by environmental
factors such as rainfall or slow-running water.
2) The sensor module shall identify, by type, sensor, tamper, and failure alarms either
locally at the sensor module, or centrally at a central controller. The sensor cables
shall provide the data paths between the sensor modules, for the transmission,
reception and display of alarm conditions.
3) Each sensor module shall include an internal interface for the collection of auxiliary
sensor data.
4) It shall be possible to supply power directly to each unit for applications that require
either a single sensor module or multiple sensor modules with independent power
sources.
5) The sensor module's response shall be demonstrated by an analog output signal that
can be displayed on a voltmeter or on an analog voltage-recording device. The
output signal shall be encoded to indicate the alarm trip-point, thereby showing the
sensor module’s degree of detection above or below the level required to cause an
alarm.
6) Sensor Module Technical Characteristics:
Sensor
Module
Power 12 VDC at 150 milliampere (mA)
Output
Sensor
Module
Requirements
Power
Stand-alone: 12 VDC 500 mA max
Network: 48 VDC 175 mA max
Sensor capability
Two (2) zones independent of other sensor
modules
Sensor coverage
1,312 ft. (400 m)
Calibration
Locally and remotely from Central Controller
Self Test
Via 4 relay drive points
Detection coverage
Unlimited expansion using multiple modules
Nuisance avoidance
Adaptive filtering
Connectivity
RS-485 twisted pair cable
Sensor Support
Dual redundant data paths
Transmission capability
Eight (8) contact-closure signals
o. The field power module shall be capable of supplying power to sensor modules as
follows:
1) In a network configuration where power is supplied redundantly via the sensor
cables, the sensor modules shall operate within specifications when power is
removed from either of the two (2) sensor cables.
2) Each cable zone shall be capable of being calibrated either locally at the sensor
module, or remotely from a central controller. Additional signal processing
parameters, including high speed and low speed response, shall be capable of being
set from a central controller.
E611-10
11-09
3) Detection sensitivity for each zone shall be adjusted either locally at the sensor
module with a local interface module, or from a central controller. Access to the local
calibration controls shall require the removal of the enclosure’s cover and shall cause
a tamper alarm to be generated.
4) Power Module Technical Characteristics:
Output support
Nine (9) sensor modules max
3,063 yards (yds.) (2,800 m)
System block configuration
1,531 yds. (1,400 m)
Power Output
Stand-alone: 12 VDC 500 mA max
Network: 48 VDC 175 mA max
10.
Microwave Sensors: The system shall be a modular microwave outdoor intrusion detection
sensor based on microwave radar technology. The detection field shall be formed by radio
frequency (RF) signals, in the X-band, carried between a transmitter and a receiver. The RF
signals shall form an invisible electromagnetic detection field that can detect the presence of
an intruder who walks, crawls, rolls, jumps, or runs through a detection field as follows.
a. transmitter shall create the RF signals that form the detection field. A receiver shall
house the necessary electronics to monitor the detection field and to raise an alarm when
an intruder enters the field. The transmitter and receiver shall be powered individually, as
a standalone unit.
b. An electromagnetic wave is emitted by the antenna of the transmitter and received by the
antenna of the receiver. The receiver shall detect changes that are caused by the
presence of an intruder.
c. The system shall detect moving intruders having a significant electromagnetic crosssection (e.g. humans, vehicles, and other large conductive objects) rejecting other
environmental stimuli.
d. The system shall be capable of detecting human intruders moving through the detection
field regardless of the direction of motion.
e. Processor description: The receiver shall contain the necessary electronics to perform
the signal processing for the detection zone. The transmitter and receiver shall be
operated as a standalone unit with independent power and data. Both the transmitter and
receiver shall be installed in weatherproof enclosures.
f. Distributed processing: Transmitter-receiver pairs distributed along a perimeter shall
provide extended range and fail-safe operation. The failure of one (1) pair shall not affect
the coverage of the remainder of the perimeter.
g. Alarms: The signal processor shall identify intrusion and tamper/fail alarms locally, at the
transmitter or receiver.
1) An alarm caused by opening the outer enclosure of the transmitter or receiver shall
be identified as a tamper alarm. Tamper alarms shall be distinctive from intrusion
alarms.
2) Alarms caused by power failure or internal electronic failure are fail alarms, distinctive
from intrusion alarms.
h. Microwave Sensor System Technical Characteristics:
Operating voltage
11 – 15 VDC 70mA max. current
Transmitter
Operating voltage
11 – 15 VDC 30mA max. current
Receiver
Operating Environment
-22F (–30ºC) and 140 F (60ºC)
LEDs
POWER ON, WRONG CHANNEL, ALARM
E611-11
11-09
Maximum zone length
33 ft. (10 m) and a maximum of 1500 ft. (457 m) per zone.
Detection Success Probability
75 lbs. (34 kg) 99% with a 95% confidence factor
Operating frequency
X Band 10.525 ± 0.025 gigahertz (GHz)
Type modulation
Class A2 with one (1) of six (6) selectable crystal-controlled
frequencies.
Detection movement speed
2.0 in. sec. (5 cm/sec.) to 26 ft. sec. (8 m/sec.)
Audio assessment
Via 1/8 in. phone jack on receiver
Alarms
Tamper, failure, intrusion
Tamper/fail alarm
Via sealed relay rated one (1) ampere 28 VDC
Intrusion field alarm
Via sealed relay rated two (2) ampere 28 VDC.
Intrusion alarm latch time
Adjustable: 0.5 sec and 10 sec
Processing
Distributed: receiver/transmitter pairs
Perimeter Length
Single Receiver/transmitter pair: 1500 ft. (457 m)
Multiple pairs: Unlimited
11.
12.
Taut-wire Sensors: These sensors shall consist of a perimeter intrusion detection sensor
incorporated into a wire security fence. Intrusion detection shall be achieved by sensing the
cutting of any single wire or deflection of the fence, such as by climbing.
a. Sensor zone: Includes one (1) or more 200 ft. (61 m) maximum sections of seven (7)
ft.(2.3 m) high parallel fence. Each sector shall consist of 13 horizontal barbed wires
attached to the taut-wire fence posts, and three (3) strands as outriggers, and an "antiladder" trip wire supported by rods extending from the outriggers for a total vertical height
of approximately eight (8) ft. (2.6 m).
b. Displacement switches for each horizontal wire shall be mounted within a pre-wired
channel fastened to the fabric fence post at the midpoint of each section. Outrigger
barbed wire and tripwire may share the same switch in these locations.
c. Abnormal displacement of a switch lever resulting from cutting or deflecting its attached
wire, as by climbing on or through fence strands, shall initiate an alarm condition. A
damping mechanism within the sensor shall reduce alarm thresholds due to slowly
changing environmental phenomena such as the ground shifting, daily and seasonal
temperature variations, winds changes, etc.
d. Sensor switches shall be provided with electrical contact closures as a means for
initiating an alarm condition.
e. The system shall provide relay outputs to interface alarm outputs with the overall IDS.
f. Taut-wire Sensor Technical Characteristics:
Power requirements
Input: 120 – 208 VAC
Sensor zone control unit
capability
Up to 10 zones
Sensitivity
0.75 in. (19 mm)
Environment Limits
Winds up to 35 mph (56 km/h)
Electrostatic Field Sensors: These sensors generate an electrostatic field around one (1) or
more horizontal wires and detect intrusion of the electrostatic field as follows.
a. Sensors shall initiate an alarm when an intruder attempts to approach or scale a fence or
physical barrier. Electrostatic field sensors shall detect human presence by generating an
E611-12
11-09
electric field around one (1) or more horizontal wires that detects the induced signal in
parallel sensing wires.
b. Sensors shall monitor the induced signal for changes that result from the presence of a
human body, which distorts coupling between transmitting and sensor wires.
c. Sensor components shall consist of one (1) or more signal generator field wires and
mounting hardware, sensing wires, an amplifier/signal processors, power supplies, and
necessary circuitry hardware. Mounting and support hardware shall be provided by the
equipment manufacturer.
d. Wires shall be spring tension-mounted and provided with end-of-line terminators to detect
cutting, shorting, or breaking of the wires.
e. Sensor configuration shall be able to detect an intruder that may crawl under the bottom
wire, through the wires, or over the top wire by divided sensor zones.
f. Signal processing circuitry shall provide filtering to distinguish nuisance alarms.
g. Sensor configuration shall incorporate balanced, opposed field construction to eliminate
distant field noise.
h. Sensor sensitivity shall be adjustable. Adjustment controls shall be inaccessible to
operating personnel and system sensitivity controls shall be set at approximately
midrange.
i. Sensors shall provide some means of indicating an alarm condition at the protected
perimeter to facilitate installation and calibration.
j. The sensor system shall include an indicator disabling device within a tamperproof
enclosure.
k. Electrostatic Field Sensor Technical Characteristics:
Power
115 -120 VAC transformer
Operating
Requirements
Power
16-22 VAC, 225 mA single zone
275 dual zone
Detection Sensitivity
77 lbs within 3 ft. (915 mm)- midrange setting
Detection Velocity
0.1 ft. (30 m) - 10 ft. (300 m) per sec
Supervision
AC Monitoring of fence and field wires – open,
short, and grounded circuits
Tamper Switch
One (1)-pole, two (2) position
Lightening arrestor
Transistors on all relay output and power inputs
Battery Charger
Built-in
Processor Enclosure
Base plate, steel NEMA enclosure
Weather resistant
13.
Gate Sensors: They shall be provided in accordance with specific fence sensor
manufacturer's recommendations to ensure continuous fence sensor zone protection for the
entire protected perimeter.
a. When gate units are not provided by the fence sensor manufacturer, provide separately
zoned Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS) gate sensors.
b. Sensors shall perform as specified in Section 2.03-E.6 entitled "Balanced Magnetic
Switches (BMS)."
E. Interior Detection Devices: (Sensors)
1. The IDS shall consist of interior, exterior, and other detection devices that are capable of:
a. Locating intrusions at individually protected asset areas or at an individual portal;
b. Locating intrusions within a specific area of coverage;
c. Locating failures or tampering of individual sensors or components.
E611-13
11-09
2. Provide and adjust for devices so that coverage is maximized in the space or area it is
installed in. For large rooms where multiple devices are required, ensure device coverage is
overlapping.
3. Detection sensitivity shall be set up to ensure maximum coverage of the secure area is
obtained while at the same time limiting excessive false alarms due to the environment and
impact of small animals. All detection devices shall be anti-masking with exception of video
motion detection.
4. Dual sensor technology shall be used when possible. Sensor technology shall not be of the
same type that is easily defeated by a single method. This will reduce the amount of false
alarms.
5. Interior Environmental Conditions: Systems shall be able to operate in environmentally
protected interior areas and shall meet operational performance requirements for the
following ambient conditions:
a. If components are installed in unheated areas they shall be able to operate in
temperatures as low as -17 C;
b. Interior Sensor Environmental Characteristics:
Temperatures
0 to 50 C
Pressure
Sea Level to 15,000 ft. (4573m) above sea level
Humidity
5% - 95%
Fungus
Components of non-fungus nutrient materials
Acoustical Noise
Suitable for high noise environments above 100db
6. Balanced Magnetic Switches (BMS)
a. BMS switches shall be surface or recessed mounted according to manufacture’s
instructions. Recessed mounted is the preferred method to reduce tampering or defeating
of the system. Switches shall activate when a disturbance in the balanced magnetic field
occurs.
b. Switches shall have a minimum of two (2) encapsulated reed switches.
c. Contractor shall provide each BMS with a current protective device, rated to limit current
to 80% of the switch capacity.
d. Surface Mounted BMS: For exterior application, components shall be housed in
weatherproof enclosures.
e. BMS field adjustments in the fixed space between magnet and switch housing shall not
be possible. Attempts to adjust or disturb the magnetic field shall cause a tamper alarm.
f. BMS Technical Characteristics:
Maximum current
.25 amperes
Maximum voltage
30 VDC
Maximum power
3.0 W (without internal terminating
resistors).
resistors).
Components
1.0
W
(with
internal
Three (3) pre-adjusted reed switches
Three (3) pre-adjusted magnets
Output contacts
Transfer type SPDT
Contact rating
0.5 amperes, 28 VDC
Switch mechanism
Internally adjustable
E611-14
terminating
11-09
¼ - ½ in. (6-13 mm)
Wiring
Two (2) wires #22 American Wire Gauge (AWG),
three (3) or 11 foot attached cable
Activation lifetime
1,000,000 activations
Enclosure
Nonferrous materials
Tamper alarm activation
Cover opened 1/8 in. (3 mm) and inaccessible
until actuated
7. Window Intrusion Detection: These IDS devices shall detect intrusions thru inertia (shock) or
by sound, and shall utilize either a Breakwire Sensor or Acoustic and Seismic Sensor.
a. Breakwire Sensors (wire trap):
1) Detect intrusion thru shock or breakage of window glazing. Also used for the
protection of utility openings.
2) Sensors shall consist of fine wire embedded in or affixed to interior of glazing.
Breakage of protected glazing shall result in wire breakage.
3) Wire shall be hard-drawn copper up to #26 AWG diameter.
4) If sensors are affixed to glazing the sensor shall be protected by a clear coating
which shall not affect sensor functioning.
5) Sensor shall be terminated in insulated connectors which are concealed and tamper
resistant.
6) Protection of inlet openings:
a) Shall consist of up to 26 AWG hard-drawn copper wire with a tensile strength of
17.8 N 4 pounds maximum.
b) Wire shall be interlaced throughout the opening such that no opening between
wires shall be larger than 4 in. (100 mm) on center.
c) Sensors shall be terminated so that attempts to cut the wire or otherwise enlarge
openings between wires shall cause an alarm.
d) Sensors shall be terminated in insulated connectors which are concealed and
tamper resistant.
b. Acoustic and Seismic Glass Break Detectors:
1) Detects intrusion thru the use of audible sound and vibration emitted from the
breaking of glass using a tuned frequency range and sound pattern recognition. This
initiates an alarm when glass they protect is broken or cracked.
2) Detectors shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacture’s installation
instructions.
3) The detector’s power circuit shall be switched via an output relay on the control panel
to provide latching alarm LED reset capability.
4) Sensors shall be contained in a fire-resistant ABS plastic housing and must be
mounted in contact with a window.
5) Sensing shall be accomplished through the use of a mechanical filtered piezoelectric
element.
6) Sensors shall have a sensitivity adjustment controlling output voltage from the
piezoelectric element which triggers a solid-state latching device.
7) Sensors shall selectively filter input to minimize false alarms and not initiate alarm in
response to ambient seismic vibrations or other ambient stimuli.
8) A manufacture’s test unit will be used to validate the sensor by simulating glass
breakage.
9) The Contractor shall provide sensors for adjusting sensitivity and two-sided
polyurethane tape with acrylic adhesive for window attachment.
10) Sensor shall include exterior label to protect adhesive tape from direct sunlight.
11) Window Intrusion Detection Sensor Technical Specifications:
E611-15
11-09
Power
Auxiliary power supply 12 VDC @ 25 mA (+/-)
10%
Power Input
10 – 15 VDC at 16mA protected against reverse
polarity, 20 mA during relay closure
Relay Output Rating
Minimum of 25 VDC mA
Coverage Audio
6,000 Square ft.
Coverage Glass Break
25 ft. (7.5 m) wide by 25 ft. wide (7.5 m)
Minimum: 25 feet (7.62 m) from the detector to the
furthest point on protected glass.
Audio Output
300 – 12,000 HZ
Alarm Output
Relay NO or NC selectable
Interconnection
12 pin Panduit connector, 22 AWG
Radio Frequency Interface
No alarm or setup on between frequencies 26 –
100 MHz 50 v/m
Immunity to mobile RF interference 100 watts @
9.8 Ft. (3 m) in 27-100 MHz range
Alarm period
Two (2) to three (3)
Mounting
Ceiling, same wall, adjacent wall, opposite wall
Features
Test and alarm LEDs for acoustic seismic and
alarm condition latching, Alarm LED and tamper
switch on cover.
Alarm verification
Digital signal processing
processing technologies
Detection ability
Single and multi-pane glass, wired glass,
tempered and laminated glass to ¼ inch (6 mm)
or thickness
or
dual
acoustic
8. Screening: This material shall be used on windows to protect and detect intrusion as follows.
a. Security screens shall be constructed from a maximum of 26 AWG insulated hard-drawn
copper.
b. Screens shall be connected to an alarm circuitry by means of flexible armored cords.
Security screen circuitry shall provide end-of-line resistors in series or equivalent
methods ensuring alarm activation if short-circuiting of the screen is attempted.
c. If unable to install a break wire sensor (wire traps), then tamper switches will be provided.
d. Contractor shall provide tamper switches in the frames as required with not less than one
(1) switch on each side if dimensions are two (2) ft. square (610 mm) or less, and two (2)
switches if dimensions exceed two (2) ft. square (610 mm). Tamper switches shall be
corrosion-resistant, spring-operated, and shall initiate an alarm with a movement of two
(2) in. (50 mm) or less before access to the switch is possible.
e. Electrical characteristics of the switch shall match the alarm system requirements.
9. Vibration Sensors: These sensors shall initiate alarms upon detecting drilling, cutting, or
blasting through walls, or other methods of forced entry through a structure as follows.
E611-16
11-09
a. Sensors shall detect and selectively amplify signals generated by forced penetration of a
protective structure.
b. Sensors shall be designed to give peak response to structurally conveyed vibrations
associated with forcible attack on the protected surface.
c. Sensors will initiate an alarm if attempts are made to remove them from the surface of the
wall.
d. Sensors shall be enclosed in protective mountings.
e. Sensors shall include an adjustable alarm discriminator to prevent incidental vibrations
which may occur from triggering the alarm circuit.
f. Sensors shall be provided with a tamper switch.
g. Sensor sensitivity shall be individually adjustable unless a sensor is designed to
accommodate vibration ranges of specific surface type on which it will be mounted.
Sensitivity adjustments shall not be accessible without removing the sensor cover. Also,
a sensor shall not be responsive to airborne sound.
h. Vibration Sensor Technical Characteristics:
Power requirements
External DC power source
Eight (8)- 14.5 VDC, two (2) volt max peak to
peak ripple
Alarm output
Form C (NO/C/NC) solid state alarm relay, rated
100 mA, 28 VDC
Tamper Connection
Tamper switch and external magnetic
Current rating and alarm
output
No alarm state 20mA SPDT relay contact rating
(Form C)
Sensor range
Concrete (poured) 13.2 ft. (4 m)
Concrete block 6.6 ft. (2 m)
Brick block 3.3 ft. (1 m)
Frequency range
3kHz-20kHz (-15db)
7kHz-10kHz (-10db)
Adjustable
Sensitivity eight (8) steps
Alarm response 0-30 sec
10.
Passive Infrared Motion Sensors (PIR): These sensors shall detect an intruder presence by
monitoring the level of infrared energy emitted by objects within a protected zone and meet
ANSI PIR-01 Passive Infrared Motion Detector Standards Features for Enhancing False
Alarm Immunity. An alarm shall be initiated when motion and temperature changes within set
patterns are detected as follows.
a. The detector shall provide multiple detection zones distributed at a variety of angles and
distance.
b. Sensors shall be passive in nature; no transmitted energy shall be required for detection.
c. Sensors shall be sensitive to infrared energy emitted at wavelengths corresponding to
human body and other objects at ambient temperatures.
d. Sensors shall not alarm in response to general area thermal variations and shall be
immune to radio frequency interference.
e. Sensors shall not be susceptible to changes in temperature due to an air conditioner
being turned on or off.
f. Sensors shall be housed in a tamper-alarmed enclosure.
g. Sensor detectors shall include motion analyzer processing, adjustable lens, and walk test
LED’s visible from any angle.
E611-17
11-09
h. Sensors shall provide some means of indicating an alarm condition during installation
and calibration. A means of disabling the indication shall be provided within the sensor
enclosure.
i. Sensor detectors shall include a motion monitoring verification circuit that will signal
trouble or alarm if the detector fails to detect motion for an extended period.
j. PIR Technical Characteristics:
Power
Six (6) – 12 VDC
25 mA continuous current draw
38 mA peaks
Alarm Velocity
Five (5) ft. (1500 mm) at a velocity of 0.1 ft. (30
mm) per second, and one (1) step per second,
assuming 6 in. (150 mm) per step.
Also, faster than 0.1 foot (30 mm) per second, up
to 10 feet (3000 mm) per second
11.
Maximum detection range
35 ft.(10.6 m)
Frequency
rangeactivation or setup use
26 to 950 MHz using a 50 watt transmitter located
1 ft. from the unit or attached wiring
non
Infrared detection
3°F (1 1/2°C) different from the background
temperature
Detection Pattern
180 degrees for volumetric units, non PIR 360
PIR 360°Detection Pattern
Programmable 60 detection zones including one
directly below
Mounting
Ceiling and walls
Ceiling heights
Eight (8) ft. (2.4 m) – 18 ft (5.4 m)
Sensitivity adjustments
Three (3) levels
Microwave-Passive Infrared Detector: This sensor shall be designed to detect the motion of a
human body within a protected area by means of a combination of microwave sensing
technology and passive infrared (MPIR) sensing technology as follows.
a. The sensor shall require both technologies to sense intrusion before an alarm may occur.
b. The sensor shall be designed for wall mounting on swivel bracket. A high-security
gimbaled bracket shall be provided.
c. The PIR fields of view shall be focused on the pyroelectric element by means of an
internal multi-faceted mirror.
d. The sensor shall incorporate a look-down lens system that detects the passing of an
intruder directly beneath the sensor.
e. The sensor shall incorporate a microwave supervision system which shall activate the
trouble output if the device technology fails.
f. The sensor shall incorporate self-diagnostics which shall monitor the sensor systems and
report a trouble to the control panel if any system device fails.
g. The sensor shall have compensation against loss of sensitivity as the ambient
temperature nears human body temperature.
E611-18
11-09
h. MPIR Technical Characteristics:
Technology
Microwave and Passive Infrared
Power
Nine (9) – 15 VDC max current consumption 22
mA at 12 VDC
Operating Temperature
32°F (0° C) – 120° F (49° C)
Detection Area
98 ft. (30 m) long by 9.8 ft. (3 m) wide or 69 ft. (21
m) long by 69 ft. (21m) wide
Electronics
Microcontroller based
Alarm Contact
Form-C rated 125 mA, 28 VDC
Tamper Contact
125 mA, 28 VDC
Trouble Contact
Form-B rated 25 mA, 30 VDC
Microwave
Frequency
12.
Operating
10.525 GHz
Microwave Sensitivity
Adjustable on circuit board
Detection pattern adjustment
Changing of internal lens
Sensing element
Pyro-electric
LED Indicators
PIR, microwave, alarm
Bug and Dust protection
zero-clearance, gasket bug guard
Lens
Interchangeable: standard 60x80 ft. (18x24 m),
corner mounting, ultra-wide, pet alley, long range,
room and corridor combo, room and ceiling
combo, creep zone
Ultrasonic Sensors: These sensors shall transmit ultrasonic energy into a protected zone,
receiving the direct and reflected energy, and monitoring frequency shift between transmitted
and received signals as follows.
a. Sensors shall automatically adapt to changing levels of air turbulence and shall consist of
a control unit and as many transceivers as required to protect a zone within limitations of
the control unit per manufacture’s instructions.
b. Ultrasonic system sensors shall provide a means of indicating an alarm condition at the
protected zone during installation and calibration. This indication shall be provided with a
disabling device within the sensor enclosure.
c. Transceivers shall consist of an adjustable-gain preamplifier, an ultrasonic-to-electrical
transducer, and an electrical-to-ultrasonic transducer in a single enclosure. Transducers
shall be adjustable in position to allow adequate adjustment and directivity.
d. Each sensor will consist of sensitivity adjustments. Controls shall be inaccessible to
operating personnel and sensitivity requirements shall be set approximately at midrange.
e. Sensor elements shall be housed in a tamper-alarmed enclosure.
f. Ultrasonic Sensor Technical Characteristics:
Power output
Peak not to exceed 105 dB at three (3) ft. (900
mm)
Transceiver protection zone
20 ft. (6 m) by 30 ft. (9.2 m) in a zone with an 8 ft.
(2440 mm) to 12 ft. (3660 mm) ceiling
Nuisance alarm reduction
Selective filtering
Detection frequency range
Above 24 kHz and below 30 kHz (nominally 26
E611-19
11-09
kHz)
Detection velocity
5 ft. (1500 mm) at a velocity of 0.5 ft. (150 mm)
per second to 15 feet (4570 mm) per second, also
Higher than 0.5 foot (150 mm) per second, up to
eight (8) ft. (2440 mm) per second
13.
Photoelectric Sensors: The sensor devices shall be able to detect an intruder presence by
sending out a series of infrared or ultraviolet beams. Intrusion is based on disruption of the
signal beams as follows.
a. Sensors shall consist of a modulating transmitter, focusing lenses, mirrors, demodulating
receiver, power supply, and interconnecting lines.
b. Beam transmitters shall be designed to emit light. Beams may be reflected by one (1) or
more mirrors before being received and amplified.
c. The photoelectric sensor shall initiate an alarm when the beam is interrupted with
monitoring controls set at midrange.
d. Transmitted beams shall be uniquely modulated to prohibit defeat of the IDS system by
shining another light source into the receiver.
e. Sensors shall provide a means of local alarm indication on the detector for use at the
protected zone during installation and calibration.
f. Sensors shall include an indicator-disabling device within the sensor enclosure.
g. Sensors shall utilize automatic gain control or be provided with sensitivity adjustments to
allow for various beam lengths.
h. Sensor controls shall be inaccessible to operating personnel.
i. Sensors that use multiple beams shall be tested by attempting to crawl under and jump
through and over beams. Each system sensor shall provide cutoffs of at least 90% to
handle a high percentage of light cutoffs prior to initiating an alarm.
j. Sensor components shall be housed in tamper-alarmed enclosure.
k. Photoelectric Sensor Technical Characteristics:
Power requirements
Nine (9)-16 VDC, protected against reverse
polarity
Relay output
Normally closed. 18 ohm resister in series with
contacts. 0.5 amperes resistance/24 VDC
Current
Transmitter 15 mA, Receiver 15 mA
LED
Alignment, walk-test alarm, off
Range
Indoor: 130 ft. (39 m)
Outdoor: 65 ft. (19.5 m)
Alarm relay contacts
Two (2) amperes at 120 VAC minimum
Enclosure
High impact acrylic
Type
Dual beam
Mounting
Wall, corner, flush
Beam width
Six (6) degrees
Receiver field of view
Six (6) degrees horizontal and vertical
Adjustments
Vertical +10 – 20 degrees
Horizontal 30 degrees
E611-20
11-09
14.
15.
Alarm period
Two (2) – three (3) sec
Infrared source
Long-life Gallium Arsenide LED
Infrared sensor
PIN photodiode
Transmitter Frequency
One (1) kHz 10 microsecond pulse width
IR Wavelength
950 nm
CCTV Video Motion Detection Sensors: Refer to Section 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
that outlines related video motion detection requirements.
Pressure Mat Detectors: These devices shall be able to detect the presence of people in a
localized zone. Pressure from standing or walking across an area where a mat is place
detects a closed circuit as follows.
a. The mat shall be easily interfaced directly to a micro-sensor controller.
b. Shall be sealed on all edges and pre-wired and made of durable material that is
waterproof for indoor/outdoor use.
c. This pressure sensitive mat shall be capable of being easily hidden under existing carpet
or other entry mat without effecting operation, to include the prevention of false or
nuisance alarms.
d. Shall have a slip resistant surface with four (4) lead fail-safe wiring.
e. Mat detectors shall be resistant to water and dust and the wiring circuitry shall be capable
of direct supervision.
f. Pressure Mat Detector Technical Characteristics:
Operating Voltage
15 VDC
AC with max current 20 mA
Activation Weight
80 lbs. (36.28kg. per 3 in. (76.2mm) square
Activation Lifespan
500,000 activations without failure
16.
Tamper Alarm Switches: The following IDS sensors shall be used to monitor and detect
potential tampering of sensors, control panels and enclosures.
a. Tamper Switches: All enclosures including cabinets, housings, boxes, raceways, and
fittings with hinged doors or removable covers containing circuits and power supplies
related to the IDS shall include corrosion-resistant tamper switches.
b. Tamper alarms shall be annunciated to be clearly distinguishable from IDS alarms.
c. Tamper switches will not be in a viewable from a direct line of sight perspective. The
minimum amount of time the tamper switch becomes active and sends a signal after an
enclosure is opened or panel removable is attempted, shall be one (1) second.
d. Tamper switches will initiate when enclosure doors or covers is removed as little as 1/4
in. (6.35 mm) from the closed position unless otherwise indicated. Tamper switches shall
be:
1) Push/pull automatic reset type;
2) Inaccessible until switch is activated;
3) Spring-loaded and held in closed position by door or cover; and
4) Wired to break a circuit when door or cover is removed with each sensor annunciated
individually at a central reporting processor.
e. Fail-Safe Mode: Shall provide the capability to detect and annunciate diminished
functional capabilities and perform self-tests. Fail-safe alarms shall be annunciated to be
clearly distinguishable from other types of alarms.
F. Power Supply
1. A power supply shall only be utilized if the control panel is unable to support the load
requirements of the IDS system.
E611-21
11-09
2. All power supplies shall be UL rated and able to adequately power two entry control devices
on a continuous base without failure.
3. Power supplies shall meet the following minimum technical characteristics:
INPUT POWER
110 VAC 60 HZ 2 amp
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
12 VDC Nominal (13.8 VDC)
24 VDC Nominal (27.6 VDC)
Filtered and Regulated
BATTERY
Dependant on Output Voltage shall provide up
to 14 Ah, rechargeable
OUTPUT CURRENT
4 amp max. @ 13.8 VDC
3 amp max. @ 27.6 VDC
BATTERY FUSE SIZE
3.5 A @ 250 VAC
CHARGING CIRCUIT
Built-in standard
G. Enclosures:
1. All control panels, input and output modules, and power supplies shall be housed inside a
metal enclosure in accordance with National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA)
250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
2. The enclosure shall be UL rated, lockable and alarmed with a tamper alarm switch that is
monitored by the control panel.
3. The enclosures will be NEMA 4 rated if exterior mounted.
4. All connections to the enclosure shall meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the NEC.
2.03 INSTALLATION KIT
A. General
1. The kit shall be provided that, at a minimum, includes all connectors and terminals, labeling
systems, audio spade lugs, barrier strips, punch blocks or wire wrap terminals, heat shrink
tubing, cable ties, solder, hangers, clamps, bolts, conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray, etc.,
required to accomplish a neat and secure installation. All wires shall terminate in a spade lug
and barrier strip, wire wrap terminal or punch block. Unfinished or unlabeled wire connections
shall not be allowed. All unused and partially opened installation kit boxes, coaxial, fiberoptic, and twisted pair cable reels, conduit, cable tray, and/or cable duct bundles, wire rolls,
physical installation hardware shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer. The following
sections outline the minimum required installation sub-kits to be used:
2. System Grounding
a. The grounding kit shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All head end
equipment and power supplies shall be connected to earth ground via internal building
wiring, according to the NEC.
b. This includes, but is not limited to:
1) Coaxial Cable Shields
2) Control Cable Shields
3) Data Cable Shields
4) Equipment Racks
5) Equipment Cabinets
6) Conduits
7) Cable Duct blocks
8) Cable Trays
9) Power Panels
10) Grounding
11) Connector Panels
E611-22
11-09
3. Coaxial Cable: The coaxial cable kit shall include all coaxial connectors, cable tying straps,
heat shrink tabbing, hangers, clamps, etc., required to accomplish a neat and secure
installation.
4. Wire and Cable: The wire and cable kit shall include all connectors and terminals, audio
spade lugs, barrier straps, punch blocks, wire wrap strips, heat shrink tubing, tie wraps,
solder, hangers, clamps, labels etc., required to accomplish a neat and orderly installation.
5. Conduit, Cable Duct, and Cable Tray: The kit shall include all conduit, duct, trays, junction
boxes, back boxes, cover plates, feed through nipples, hangers, clamps, other hardware
required to accomplish a neat and secure conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray installation in
accordance with the NEC and this document.
6. Equipment Interface: The equipment kit shall include any item or quantity of equipment,
cable, mounting hardware and materials needed to interface the systems with the identified
sub-system(s) according to the OEM requirements and this document.
7. Labels: The labeling kit shall include any item or quantity of labels, tools, stencils, and
materials needed to label each subsystem according to the OEM requirements, as-installed
drawings, and this document.
8. Documentation: The documentation kit shall include any item or quantity of items, computer
discs, as installed drawings, equipment, maintenance, and operation manuals, and OEM
materials needed to correctly provide the system documentation as required by this
document and explained herein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. IDS installation shall be in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 639 Standards for
Intrusion Detection Units and UL 634 Standards for Connectors with Burglar Alarm Systems, and
appropriate manufacture’s installation manuals for each type of IDS.
B. Components shall be configured with appropriate “service points” to pinpoint system trouble in
less than 30 minutes.
C. The Contractor shall install all system components including VA furnished equipment, and
appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall furnish all necessary
connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and
operable system.
D. The IDS will be designed, engineered, installed, and tested to ensure all components are fully
compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether
the system is a stand alone or designed as a computer network.
E. The IDS shall be able to be integrated with other security subsystems. Integration with these
security subsystems shall be achieved by computer programming and the direct hardwiring of the
systems. Determination for methodology shall be outlined when the system(s) is/are being
designed and engineered. For installation purposes, the IDS shall utilize an output module for
integration with other security subsystems. The Contractor will ensure all connections are per the
OEM and that any and all software upgrades required to integrate the systems are installed prior
to system start-up.
F. For programming purposes, the Contractor shall refer to the manufacturer’s requirements and
Contracting Officer instructions for correct system operations. This includes ensuring computers
being utilized for system integration meet or exceeds the minimum system requirements outlined
in the IDS software packages.
G. Lightening and power surges to the central alarm reporting and display unit shall be protected at
both ends against excessive voltages. This requirement shall apply for circuits that are routed
both in underground conduits and overhead runs.
H. At a minimum, the Contractor shall install primary detection devices, such as three electrode gastype surge arresters, and secondary protectors to reduce dangerous voltages to levels that will
cause no damage. Fuses shall not be permitted as protection devices.
I. The Contractor shall provide fail-safe gas tube type surge arresters on exposed IDS data circuits.
In addition, transient protection shall protect against spikes up to 1000 volts peak voltage with a
one-microsecond rise time and 100-microsecond decay time, without causing false alarms. The
E611-23
11-09
protective device shall be automatic and self-restoring. Also, circuits shall be designed or
selected assuming a maximum of 25 ohms to ground.
J. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in OEM's original unopened containers, clearly
labeled with the OEM's name, equipment model and serial identification numbers, and UL
logo. The Contracting Officer may inventory the IDS equipment at the time of delivery and
reject items that do not conform to this requirement.
2. Storage and Handling: Store and protect equipment in a manner that will preclude damage as
directed by the Contracting Officer.
K. Cleaning and Adjustments:
1. Cleaning: Subsequent to installation, clean each system component of dust, dirt, grease, or
oil incurred during installation in accordance to manufacture instructions.
2. Prepare for system activation by following manufacturer’s recommended procedures for
adjustment, alignment, or synchronization. Prepare each component in accordance with
appropriate provisions of the component’s installation, operations, and maintenance
instructions.
L. Tamper Switches
1. Install tamper switches to initiate an alarm signal when a panel, box, or component housing
door or cover is moved as little as 6.35 mm 1/4 inch from the normally closed position unless
otherwise specified.
2. Locate tamper switches within enclosures, cabinets, housings, boxes, raceways, and fittings
to prevent direct line of sight to any internal components and to prevent tampering with switch
or circuitry.
3. Conceal tamper switch mounting hardware so that the location of the switch within the
enclosure cannot be determined from the exterior.
M. Unique IDS Installation Components:
1. BMS Surface Mounted:
a. Surface mounted BMS housing for the switch element shall have the capability to receive
threaded conduit. Housing covers for surface mounted BMS, if made of cast aluminum,
shall be secured by stainless steel screws. Magnet housing cover shall not be readily
removable and BMS housings shall be protected from unauthorized access by a cover
operated, corrosion-resistant tamper device.
b. Conductors running from a door to alarm circuits shall be contained within a flexible
armored cord constructed from corrosion-resistant metal. Each end of the armored cord
shall terminate in a junction box or other enclosure. Armored cord ends shall be
mechanically secured to the junction boxes by clamps or bushings. Conductors within the
armored cord shall be provided with lug terminals at each end. Conductors and the
armored cord shall experience no mechanical strain as the door is removed from fully
open to closed position. Switch circuits shall initiate an alarm if a short circuit is applied to
the door cord.
c. For exterior application on double gates, both BMS elements must be mounted on the
gate. Flexible armored cord constructed from corrosion-resistant metal shall be used to
provide electrical connection.
2. BMS Recessed Mounted:
a. Ball bearing door trips shall be mounted within vault door headers such that when the
locking mechanism is secured, the door bolt engages an actuator, mechanically closing
the switch.
b. Door bolt locking mechanisms shall be fully engaged before the ball bearing door trip is
activated. Also, circuit jumpers from the door shall be provided.
3. Vibration Sensors:
a. Mount vibration sensors directly contacting the surface to be protected.
b. Provide at least one (1) sensor on each monolithic slab or wall section, even though
spacing closer than that required for midrange sensitivity may result.
c. House sensors in protective mountings and fasten to surface with concealed mounting
screws or an epoxy.
E611-24
11-09
4.
5.
6.
7.
d. Adjust discriminator on the job to precise needs of application. Connect sensors to an
electronic control unit by means of wiring or fiber optics cable run in rigid steel conduit or
electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
Ultrasonic Sensors:
a. Installation shall ensure that transceiver zones slightly overlap.
b. Care shall be taken to ensure adequate sensitivity in area abundant in acousticabsorbing materials such as carpets and drapes.
c. When the protected zone is broken up by furniture or large objects, it shall not be
possible to traverse the zone undetected by moving the blind zones created by the
objects.
Passive Infrared Detectors: (PIR)
a. The protective beam shall be focused in a straight line.
b. Installed beam distance from transmitter to receiver shall not exceed 80% of the
manufacturer's maximum recommended rating.
c. Mirrors may be used to extend the beam or to establish a network of beams. Each mirror
used shall not lower the rated maximum system range by more than 50%.
d. Mirrors and photoelectric sources used in outdoor applications shall have self-heating
capability to eliminate condensation and shall be housed in weatherproof enclosures.
Taunt-Wire:
a. Housing for switch assembly shall be covered by a neoprene cap to retain the center bolt
(lever arm), which functions as a lever to translate movement of the attached horizontal
wire into contact closure. When the neoprene cap is firmly seated on the cup-shaped
polycarbonate housing, it shall function as the fulcrum for the lever (bolt).
b. Upper exposed end of the lever shall be threaded to accommodate clamping to the
horizontal wire. The lower end of the lever, which is fashioned to serve as the movable
electrical contact, shall be held suspended in a small cup-shaped contact that floats in a
plastic putty material.
c. Plastic putty used shall retain a degree of elasticity under varying temperature conditions
and provide the sensor switch with a self-adjusting property. This provides the switch with
a built-in compensating mechanism that ignores small, very slow changes in lever
alignment (i.e. which may result from environmental changes such as extreme
temperature variations and ground seepage due to weather conditions) and to react to
fast changes only, as caused by manual deflection or cutting of the wires.
d. Contractor shall provide metal slider strips having slots through which the barbed wires
pass. Wires shall be prevented from leaving the slots by rivets. A slider strip shall be
used to translate normal forces to the barbed wire and to the horizontal displacement of
the sensor.
e. Install one (1) slider strip pair, upper and lower, on every fence post except where sensor
posts or anchor strips are installed.
f. Separation between slider elements along the fence shall be 10 feet (3000 mm).
g. Attach wires of sensor to existing, specially installed fence posts, called anchor posts,
located equidistant on both sides of sensor posts and at ends of sensor zone run.
h. Anchor strip shall be a strip of steel plate on which fastening plates are installed. Weld or
otherwise attach the strip to anchor post and ends of tensed barbed wires wrapped
around the fastening plates. Attempts to climb on fastening plates or on the attached
barbed wires shall cause plates to break off, creating an alarm and making it impossible
to defeat the system by climbing at the anchor post.
i. The use of barbed wire as part of the IDS system shall be suitable for installation under a
preload tension of approximately 392 N 88 pounds and be flexible enough for convenient
manipulation during tensioning. Double-strand 15 1/2-gage barbed wire shall be the
minimum acceptable.
Electromechanical Fence Sensors:
a. The fence length shall be divided into 300 ft. (100 m) or zones.
b. Sensors shall consist of individual electromechanical sensing units mounted every threethousand and 10 ft. (3045 mm) on the fence fabric or posts and wired in series to a
sensor zone control unit and associated power supply.
E611-25
11-09
8. Electrostatic Field Sensors:
a. Sensors shall be capable of following irregular contours and barrier bends without
degrading sensitivity below the specified detection level.
B In no case shall a single sensor zone exceed 300 ft. (100 m) or be long enough to
significantly degrade sensitivity.
c. Adjacent zones shall provide continuous coverage to avoid a dead zone. Adjacent zones
shall be designed to prevent crosstalk interference.
d. Exterior components shall be housed in rugged corrosion-resistant enclosures, protected
from environmental degradation and include tamper switches.
e. Interfacing between exterior units shall be carried in underground cables.
f. Exterior support hardware shall be stainless or galvanized to avoid tension degradation.
g. Sensor and field wires shall be stainless steel. Wire spacing for various configurations
shall be maintained constant throughout each zone and shall be uniform with respect to
the ground and follow manufacturer's specifications.
h. Signal processing equipment shall be separately mounted such that no desensitized
zones are created within the zone of detection.
9. Microwave: Do not install microwave sensors where fluorescent lights may pose a problem
due to radiated ionization from lights.
3.02 TESTS AND TRAINING
A. All testing and training shall be compliant with the VA General Requirements.
---END---
E611-26
Section E620
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
This section specifies the furnishing and installation of generator
Nablus Rehabilitation Center.
for
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C.
NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit brochures on engine, radiator, sound enclosure,
muffler, battery, battery charger, control panel, and any accessory equipment
showing ratings, construction features, noise level in dba with engine room
and performance characteristics. Indicate fuel consumption at full load.
B.
Dimensional Drawings: Submit dimensional drawings of packaged unit and
any separately mounted accessory equipment such as batteries and charger.
Include weight of the packaged unit.
C.
Electrical Diagrams: Submit schematic and wiring diagrams of the electrical
system showing all factory wiring and clearly indicating all wiring and
connections to be made in the field. Include internal wiring diagrams of any
packaged controllers. Indicate wattage and voltage of any electrical strip
heaters. Also submit fully detailed interconnection drawings indicating each
individual connection to any remote equipment, including a separate
connection drawing to show point-to-point electrical wiring connections.
D.
Mechanical and Piping Diagrams. Submit detailed drawings showing all
piping connections to be made in the field. Indicate sizes and point-to-point
piping connections between unit and remote equipment (i.e. daily service and
storage fuel tanks).
E.
Construction details of bulk fuel tanks and daily service tanks.
SUBMITTALS AFTER MANUFACTURE
A.
Factory and Field Tests: Submit two copies of each factory and field test report
on the actual packaged electric generating plant provided, indicating results for all
tests described herein.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Two weeks prior to final inspection, deliver
two sets of the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals pertaining
directly to the unit provided. Bind each set in a substantial binder, with each item
properly indexed. Include the following information:
1. Project record drawings clearly indicating operating features and including asbuilt shop drawings, outline drawings, and schematic and wiring diagrams.
E620 - 1
2. Instructions for erection, alignment including tolerances, and preparation for
use.
3. Complete description of safety equipment, safety procedures and safety
precautions.
4. Starting, normal running, emergency, and shutdown procedures.
5. Normal maintenance, inspection and lubrication procedures.
6. Recommended spare parts list.
1.05
WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's 2-years warranty for complete generator set assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
U
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable manufacturers are Caterpillar, FG-Wilson, and Cummins,
(Onan) and must have a factory-approved service organization.
B. Local Representative: Provide evidence that proposed equipment
manufacturer has a locally established and authorized organization which cab
be called upon for professional advice and maintenance as may be required,
and which can immediately supply spare parts to support day to day and
emergency maintenance requirements. Failure to satisfy will disqualify a
manufacturer.
2.02
DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete, packaged, required diesel generator set. Make the
packaged system of new, unused equipment of the manufacturer's latest
design. Include all necessary instruments, devices, switches, and other
appurtenances for proper operation of the unit. Supply steel safety guards
around all external rotating parts. Provide a unit on which adjustments,
repairs and normal maintenance are possible without the use of special tools.
Provide an overall, sound attenuating housing as further described in this
section. The supplier will be responsible for the proper performance of the
complete unit and support systems. Transition time from the instant of failure
of the normal power source to the generator source shall not exceed 10
seconds as required by NEC paragraph 700-6(b)(1).
2.03
ENGINE
A.
Type: Provide a stationary, liquid-cooled, full diesel, compression ignition
engine, either naturally aspirated or turbocharged. Supply a unit suitable
for operation on No. 2 diesel fuel oil.
B.
Rating: Provide an engine with brake horsepower not less than 10 percent
greater than required by the full load rating of the generator, including
losses, and with all accessories attached.
E620 - 2
1.
Speed. Make engine speed suitable for direct connection to the generator
without exceeding engine manufacturer's published curves. Speed must not
exceed 10 rpm. Provide governor of the full hydraulic type, Woodward EGP3
with a 2301A speed controller or an approved substitution, to maintain
frequency stability of any constant load, including no load, within plus or minus
1/4 percent, and to maintain frequency regulation between no load steadystate and full load steady-state within 3 percent.
2.
Accessories. Provide all accessories, devices and appurtenances necessary
for proper operation, including but not limited to the following:
a. Lubrication System.
1.
Positive displacement mechanical lube oil pump.
2.
Full flow replaceable element oil filter.
b. Air System. Replaceable dry element air intake filter.
c. Starting System.
A.
Heavy-duty, battery-driven electric starter motor.
B.
Fully charged, lead-calcium, impact-resistant, plastic-cased, storage
battery or batteries mounted on the unit or in a separate corrosionproof rack near the unit. Make battery capacity sufficient for four
cranking cycles at firing speed of 30 seconds duration each with 15second rest periods. Provide all battery cables, connections,
electrolyte, water and a hydrometer.
C.
Static, solid-state type battery charger unit which automatically controls
the charge rate. Include a charging rate ammeter, a voltmeter, and a
manual reset, thermal overload circuit breaker to protect the rectifier
assembly and transformer. Select a charger suitable for operation at
230 volts, single phase, 50 hertz. Make full charging time be 24 hours
maximum. Mount charger on unit, using adequate vibration devices.
D.
Engine-driven alternator with full-wave rectifier and transistorized
voltage regulator for charging battery when engine is running.
3.
Coolant System. Closed, liquid coolant system complete with radiator, fan,
coolant manifold, coolant expansion chamber (overflow tank), temperature
control valve, and engine-driven coolant circulating pump.
4.
Exhaust System. High degree, critical-rated muffler with maximum silencing
capacity mounted horizontally on top of unit. Include a 50 cm length of flexible
stainless steel exhaust tubing for mounting on outlet side of muffler. Provide
exhaust condensation trap and a rain cap on exhaust end of tubing. The
generator engine exhaust, with the muffler in place, shall have the following
maximum permissible sound pressure levels:
Octave Band Center
Frequency, Hz
50 63 125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
Max. Sound Pressure
71 71 62
88
74
74
72
70
E620 - 3
-12
Level, dB re 10
5.
2.04
watts
Fuel System.
A.
Engine-driven, self-priming fuel injection pump suitable for
injecting fuel from the day tank to the engine.
B.
Day tank with float switch mounted in skid base of unit and having
a minimum capacity for operating unit at full load for 1-4 hours.
C.
Full flow replaceable element fuel filter.
D.
Flexible fuel connection lines between day tank and engine.
E.
Check valve in fuel line at day tank to prevent fuel line from
emptying back into tank.
F.
Tank shall be tank-in-tank construction. Interstitial space shall
have a fuel sensor to detect a leak in the inner tank. The alarm
shall be on the remote alarm panel.
G.
Field Connections. Flanges for all field connection shall be flush
with the surface of the acoustical enclosure. No field connections
are to be made inside the enclosure. All mechanical flex connectors between the enclosure and field piping are to be provided by
the manufacturer.
GENERATOR
A. Furnish a direct-coupled, synchronous, brushless-type generator, revolving field
P.M.G., exciter, 2/3 pitch built-in static rectifier and automatic voltage regulator.
B. Rating.
A.
Voltage. 400/230, three phases, four wires, grounded neutral.
B.
Frequency. 50 hertz.
C.
Kilowatts. 48Kw.
D.
Power Factor. 0.8 lagging
E.
Duty. Standby duty, used with large non-linear loads.
F.
Overload. Generator shall be sized to accommodate a 110 percent
load for 8 hours.
3. Insulation System. Class F.
4. Temperature Rise. Class B (80B C rise over a 40B C ambient).
5. Instantaneous Voltage Dip. Less than 15 percent when a full load is
applied. Less than 15 percent when a full load is removed.
6. Voltage Regulator. Voltage regulator: solid state, volts/Hz type, utilizing
silicon semi-conductor devices in control and power stages, with built-in
electro-magnetic interference suppression and designed for single or
E620 - 4
parallel operation. Manual adjustment to +/-5% of regulated voltage level
is to be possible by a potentiometer at control panel. All components are
to be sealed, moisture and heat resistant, with a suitable environmentally
protected enclosure. Voltage regulator is to automatically reduce voltage
is load exceeds capacity of generator an is to sustain a 3-phase short
circuit current at the generator terminals for the period for which the shortcircuit protection operates and at least for 3 seconds. Voltage regulator
power is to be supported by generator voltage and current to maintain
excitation field power.
7. Enclosure. Drip-proof.
8. Stator. Shall be 2/3 pitch. Windings must be true form-wound coils
incorporating rectangle wire, V.P.I..
9. Coupling. From engine, drive rotor through a semi-flexible coupling to
ensure permanent alignment.
10. Space Heaters. Provide thermostatically controlled, low surface temperature, 240-volt heaters to prevent condensation. Size heaters so that kW
rating is not less than twice the value given in the Appendix to IEEE
Standard 43, paragraph A1.3.
11. Provide under-frequency protection for the generator.
12. Provide an oversized generator termination cabinet.
2.05
CONTROL PANEL
Mount control panel on unit and include, but do not limit to, the following instruments
and protective devices.
1. Digital multimeter.
2. Automatic solid-state voltage regulator.
3. Frequency meter.
4. Non-resettable elapsed time meter.
5. Coolant temperature gauge.
6. Battery charge-rate ammeter or voltmeter.
7. Oil pressure gauge.
8. Main circuit breaker, 100 percent rated, with trip set as recommended by
generator manufacturer, with ground fault indication.
9. Combination alarm-shutdown system with manual reset and indicating lights
for high engine temperature, low engine temperature, low oil pressure, engine
overspeed and engine failed to start. Include an additional set of contacts for
remote alarms.
10. HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch for control of engine.
11. Battery-operated panel lights.
E620 - 5
12. Vibration isolators for control panel.
2.06
ENGINE START-STOP CONTROLS
Provide controls in the control panel for starting and stopping the engine, including the
following:
1.
Three-Position Selector Switch. Mount on front of the control panel with the
following positions labeled.
A. HAND: To permit starting the engine from the panel for test purposes,
without load transfer.
B. OFF: To stop engine and disconnect control for prevention of start during
maintenance and to reset automatic controls. Provide extra contact for
remote alarm.
C. AUTOMATIC: To set up circuits for automatic start and stop on demand
of remote mounted transfer switch or exerciser.
2. Cool-down Period. An adjustable from 5 to 30 minute time delay for unloaded
running of the engine generator after retransfer of the load to the norm source.
2.07 BASE
A. Mount the assembled packaged unit on a skid base of welded structural
steel, box-type construction. Use vibration isolators of either steel spring or
neoprene construction. Prime all exposed metal parts with a rust inhibitor
and finish in durable machinery enamel. Vibration isolation shall be provided
and shall be sized for 10 cm of static deflection maximum acceptance
vibration transmission to building throughout the operating vibration frequency
range is 0.04 mm amplitude.
2.08
HOUSING
A. Construction. Provide a housing with removable side panels and a hinged,
padlockable meter panel door.
B. Painting. Prime all exposed metal parts with a suitable rust inhibitor applied
to the clean bare metal.
C. Acoustical Treatment. Cover the interior of all housing sheet metal with a
1/32-inch layer of "Shield" acoustical material as manufactured by Cominco,
Ltd., Oakville, Ontario, Canada, or approved substitution.
2.09
SOUND ATTENUATION HOUSING
A. Construction. Provide an overall housing with removable side panels and a
hinged, padlockable meter panel door. Unitized construction between the
stud and the acoustical enclosure. The maximum sound level measured one
meter from the enclosure in free field conditions under full load shall not
exceed 72 dBA.
B. Painting. Prime all exposed metal parts with a suitable rust inhibitor applied
to the clean bare metal.
1. Acoustical Treatment. Intake and exhaust silencers shall be provided at the
ends of the skid.
2 Ventilation Fans. A ventilation fan or fans shall be provided in the enclosure.
3. The fans shall provide the CFM requirements for the combustion air and for
E620 - 6
removing radiant heat from the generator and the engine and maintain a 30EF
temperature rise in the enclosure. In addition to the static pressure requirements
for the enclosure, the fans shall also be able to overcome an additional 10mm of
water in static pressure. All motor starters and associated control and wiring shall
be included. Power for the fans shall be derived from the generator. The ventilation flow shall be from the generator end to the engine end. An acoustic treated
duct shall be provided between the exhaust silencer and the louver in the wall.
2.10
FACTORY TESTS
A. Before delivery to the job site, have the engine generating plant with enclosure
and radiator satisfactorily tested as a unit as described in the following
paragraphs and in accordance with the manufacturer's design parameters.
The test procedure shall simulate the head requirements for the cooling water
that are required to be met in the field conditions.
B. Shutdown Tests. Bring the engine generator to stable operation and then
create the following conditions in turn to cause alarm and shutdown.
1. High engine temperature.
2. Low engine temperature.
3. Low oil pressure.
4. Engine overspeed.
C. Voltage and Frequency Stability Tests. Have the engine generator carry rated
kW load at 0.8 power factor for 1 hour. During this test, frequency and voltage
must not vary more than parameters stated in this section.
D. Full Load Tests. Start the generator under no load and then have full rated
kW at 0.8 power factor applied in a single increment within 10 seconds of
start-up. Remove the load from the unit 5 minutes after start-up and then
reapply full rated kW at 0.8 power factor 30 seconds later. Run the unit an
additional 5 minutes under load before shutdown. During this test, the
instantaneous voltage dip must not exceed that stated in paragraph 2.4E of
this section, and frequency and voltage regulation must not vary more than
parameters stated in this section with strip chart recorders. Unit shall be
tested for 6 hours at 100 percent rated load and then at 110 percent of rated
load for 2 hours with enclosure installed and using the radiator to be furnished
with the unit.
PART3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's installation procedures. Have installation supervised
and approved by a qualified representative of the unit manufacturer.
3.02
ENGINE EXHAUST
A.
Install an 50 cm length of exhaust tubing between engine exhaust outlet and
muffler inlet. Turn muffler tailpipe up and terminate with rain cap.
E620 - 7
3.02
FAN DISCHARGE
A.
3.05
Provide an acoustically lined elbow to direct radiator fan discharge up. Brace
elbow structurally with steel that has been hot-dip galvanized after all cuts and
holes have been made. Support system must be approved for strength, finish
and appearance.
PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Using carbon dioxide or nitrogen from pressurized cylinder, test each system to
1.5 times normal operating pressure. Do not subject equipment, apparatus or
devices to pressure exceeding prescribed test pressure obtained from nameplate
data or from manufacturer=s published data. Apply tests before connecting piping
to equipment. Remove or disconnect and blank off relief valves, instruments and
devices that might be damaged by test pressure. Maintain test pressure on
system for 24 hours during which time there is to be no noticeable drop in
pressure. Check for leaks using soap solution. Isolate source of pressure during
testing.
3.06 START UP AND TESTING
A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized, factory-trained representative of the
diesel engine-generator set manufacturer to inspect field-assembled components,
and equipment installation and supervise the field tests
B. When the complete auxiliary electrical power system has been installed and prior
to the final inspection, tests all components of the system in the presence of the
engineer for proper operation of the individual components and the complete
system and to eliminate electrical and mechanical defects.
C. Furnish fuel oil, lubricating oil, anti-freeze liquid, water treatment and rust inhibitor
and load bank for testing of the diesel engine-generator set.
D. Field Tests for the Diesel Engine-Generator Set:
1. Test the engine generator set for six hours of continuous operation as follows:
a. First four hours while the set is delivering 100 percent of its specified KW
rating.
b. Last two hours while the set is delivering 110 percent of its specified KW
rating.
c. If during the 6-hour continuous test a failure occurs, either the diesel
engine shuts down or the full KW rating of the load bank is not achieved,
the test is null and void. The test(s) shall be repeated until the satisfactory
results are attained.
2. Record the following test data at 30-minute intervals:
a. Time of day, also reading of running time indicator.
b. KW.
c. Voltage on each phase.
d. Amperes on each phase.
e. Engine RPM.
f. Frequency.
g. Engine water temperature.
h. Fuel pressure
i. Oil pressure.
j. Outdoor temperature
k. Average ambient temperature in the vicinity of the diesel engine.
l. Average ambient temperature in the vicinity of the starting batteries.
3. Demonstrate that the generator set will attain proper voltage, frequency and
will accept 100 percent block load within 10 seconds from a cold start after the
closing of a single contact.
E620 - 8
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.07
4. Furnish a resistance type load for the testing of the generator:
a. When approved in writing by the engineer prior to the testing, the
Contractor may use connected loads in the building (resistant plus other
types) as part of the test load provided the Contractor assumes complete
responsibility for the use of the connected loads, including personnel
injuries and property damage.
b. Test loads shall always include adequate resistance to assure stability of
the loads and equipment during all of the testing operations. The test load
KW rating:
1) Shall not be less than 110 percent of the specified KW rating of the
largest generator set.
2) Shall not be less than 35 percent of the sum of the specified KW
ratings of the all generator sets in a paralleling system.
Battery and Starting System Test:
1. Demonstrate that the batteries and cranking motor are capable of 5 starting
attempts of 10 second cranking each at 10 second intervals with the battery
charger turned off.
Test local panels: Simulate engine failures while checking for proper operation of
each indicating lamp, alarm device and reset button.
At the completion of the field tests, fill the underground storage tank with fuel of
grade and quality as recommended by the manufacturer of the engine.
When any defects are detected during the tests, correct all the deficiencies and
repeat all or part of the 6-hour continuous test as requested by Engineer, at no
additional cost to Arab Bank.
Provide test and inspection results in writing to the Resident Engineer.
TRAINING
A. Formal training for the operation and maintenance of all packaged electric
generating plant equipment and each system specified herein shall be given to
the Owners maintenance staff by factory trained and certified personnel at the
project site. The training shall consist of a minimum of three 3-hour training
sessions. A minimum of 3 bound copies of training material and operating
manuals shall be provided at the time of training, with four additional copies
submitted at the time of Substantial Completion.
- - - END - - -
E620 - 9
SECTION E670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide and install a complete lightning protection system as indicated on the drawings and as
specified.
B. The system shall comprise of copper tape meshes, down conductors, test clamps, and earth
termination.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEC-1024
B. BS EN 62305:2006
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to section E010 – Electrical General Provision.
B. Manufacturer’s product data, technical literature and wiring diagrams.
C. Shop drawings, including cut sheets of each component and each material utilized in the
installation for the system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR TERMINATION AND ROOF MESHES
A. Conductors of roof tapes networks shall be of 20 x 3 mm copper unless otherwise specified or required
by code and fastened by means of single fixing polypropylene clamps.
2.02 DOWN CONDUCTORS
A. A 8mm Dedicated continuous reinforced bar in structural columns shall be used as a down
conductor, where such arrangement cannot be satisfied down conductors shall be 50mm2
stranded bare copper conductors installed in PVC conduits with suitable size concealed in walls.
B. Down conductor systems should take the most direct route from the air termination network to the
earth termination network. Ideally they should be symmetrically installed around the outside walls
of the structure starting from the corners. Routing to avoid side flashing should always be given
particular attention.
C. Down conductors should be positioned no more than 20 m apart around the perimeter at roof or
ground level, whichever is the greater. If the structure is over 20 m height, then the spacing is
reduced to every 10 m or part thereof.
D.
The length of the conductor forming the loop should not exceed eight times the width of the open
side of the loop.
2.03 GROUNDING
A. Types of earth termination networks.
1- Deep Driven Earth Electrode.
A soil resistivity survey indicating lower resistivity at greater depths will make the deep
driven 19 mm2 earth electrode a logical choice.
2- Parallel Earth Rod Electrodes.
Where ground conditions make deep driving of earth rods impossible, a matrix
arrangement of rods coupled to one another by conductors can be used. If possible, the
earth rods must be spaced at least equal to their driven depth.
3- Radial Strip Electrodes.
Ground that has one meter depth of soil before encountering bedrock will best be suited to
a buried radial electrode. Install the system below the area that is subject to seasonal
weather changes.
E670-1
B. Testing Grounding System.
1- An earth electrode should be connected to each down conductor with a test link incorporated
into every down conductor path. With the test link removed and without any bonding to other
services, etc. the earth resistance of each individual earth electrode should be measured.
The resistance, in ohms, should not exceed ten times the number of down conductors on the
structure. For example, if there are fifteen down conductors equally spaced around building,
then the resistance for each electrode with the test link removed should not exceed 10x15 =
150 ohms.
2- With the test links replaced the resistance to earth of the complete lightning protection system
is measured at any point on the system. The reading from this test should not exceed ten
ohms. This is still without any bonding to other services.
2.04 BONDING
A. All exposed metal work on or around the structure must be bonded to the lightning protection
system if side-flashing is to be avoided. Any metal work connected to the lightning network shall
not be connected to the main earth busbar. Aluminum or copper metal lightning system may be
used but not both into one system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The routing of the down conductors must be as straight as possible, avoiding all sharp bends or
potential backup. The curve radius of a section of the lead running around an obstacle shall not
be less than 200 mm.
B. The external metal mass located less than one meter from the down conductor must be
electrically connected to these leads (connection by riveting at 4 places) with conductors of the
same cross section as the strip itself.
C. The Mechanical equipment which is located on the roof of a construction shall be connected to
the copper meshes on the same construction.
D. The lightning down conductors must include a control junction box or a cut-off bar, in order to
allow measurement of the grounding system resistance and of the down conductor electrical
continuity. The control junction will be located 2 meters above ground level in order to be
accessible only when measurements are made. The control junction box shall not change or
interfere with the architectural aspect.
E. The liaison between the down conductor and the grounding system and the control junction must
be made by riveting at 4 places. After any check of the installation it is necessary to verify that the
connections are correct.
F. The strip will be protected between the control junction and the ground by a PVC pipe inside the
wall, this PVC pipe is two meter high from above finished floor.
G. When installing the grounding system, care should be exercised to make sure that it directed
towards the outside of the building and as distant as possible from the building. The earthing
system should be at least 3 meters from any buried electrical conduit.
H. A separate grounding system shall be provided to the fuel tank and shall comply with the local
codes and standards and as per drawings.
3.02 TESTING AND COMMISIONING
A. All tests required by local codes and regulations shall be carried out by the Contractor.
B. Tests on ground continuity as mentioned in the above rules and regulations shall be carried out
by the contractor on completed installation.
E670-2
C. The expenses for the above tests shall be carried out by the Contractor.
D. All tests must be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or the person appointed for this
purpose, but the Contractor alone will be responsible to the authorities as to the installation’s
compliance with rules and regulations.
E. The Contractor shall provide precise instruments and all labor for the testing. Test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer within 14 days of the test, and the Contractor shall issue the Certificate
upon completion, as required under the above mentioned regulations.
F. Any defects, faults or omissions of the installations made apparent by such test, shall be
corrected by the Contractor at his own expense.
G. Final tests to be carried out in the presence of the Engineer and to start upon the completion of
the work and the contractor must submit to the Engineer a detailed test procedure and time
schedule for the test.
---END---
E670-3
SECTION E710
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and electrical Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of a complete, operative and coordinated 24 Volt, networked fire alarm system. The system shall include but not
be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Network Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.03 REFRENCE STANDARDS
A.
The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA 72, the system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.
B.
The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet
the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994.
C.
The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single manufacturer (or
division thereof).
D.
The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the
appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and shall be in
compliance with the UL listing.
1.04 SCOPE
A. A network intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection and emergency voice
alarm communication network shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and
drawings.
B. Basic Performance:
1. The connection between network control panels shall be Arcnet-based or other recognized network communication scheme and shall be wired in a Class A, Style 7 fashion.
2. Alarm and trouble signals from the FACP, shall be digitally encoded by a listed electronic
devices onto a NFPA Style 6 looped multiplex communication system.
3. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded onto NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
4. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D).
5. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z).
6. Power for initiating devices and notification appliances must be from the main fire alarm
control panel, the transponder to which they are connected or to a Field Charging Power
Supply (FCPS).
7. A single ground or open on any system signaling line circuit, initiating device circuit, or notification appliance circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or
the ability to report an alarm.
8. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
9. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling.
10. Transponder devices are to consist of low current, solid-state integrated circuits, and shall
be powered locally from a primary power and standby power source.
11. Two-way telephone communication circuits shall be arranged to allow communication between the fire alarm control panel at first basement floor and up to ten (10) remote telephone locations simultaneously.
C. Basic System Operation
1. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur:
E710-1
a. The FACP alarm LED on the FACP shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric signal in the FACP shall sound.
c. The 80-character LCD display on the local FACP node and on the network displays
shall indicate all information associated with the fire alarm condition, including the
type of alarm point, and its location within the protected premises. This information
shall also be displayed on the network reporting terminal.
d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated with the
fire alarm control panel condition, along with the time and date of occurrence.
e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to
be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated
system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated on either local outputs or points located on other network nodes.
2. When a supervisory condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The FACP supervisory LED on the FACP shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric signal in the FACP control panel shall sound.
c. The 80-character LCD display on the local FACP node and on the network displays
shall indicate all information associated with the condition, including the type of point,
and its location within the protected premises. This information shall also be displayed on the network reporting terminal.
d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated with the
fire alarm control panel condition, along with the time and date of occurrence.
e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to
be activated by the particular point shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated on either local
outputs or points located on other network nodes.
3. When a trouble condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices
or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur:
a. The FACP trouble LED on the FACP shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric signal in the FACP control panel shall sound.
c. The 80-character LCD display on the local FACP node and on the network displays
shall indicate all information associated with the condition, including the type of point,
and its location within the protected premises. This information shall also be displayed on the network reporting terminal.
d. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated with the
fire alarm control panel condition, along with the time and date of occurrence.
e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to
be activated by the particular point shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated on either local
outputs or points located on other network nodes.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or
exceed the following standards. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall
supply proof that such substitute equipment does in fact equal or exceed the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment
layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.
3. Show annunciator layout and main control panel module layout, configurations and terminations.
C. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance
manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s) including technical data sheets.
E710-2
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment.
3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation which gives the information required
to properly operate the equipment and system.
D. Software Modifications
1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system
software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site
shall not exceed 4 hours.
2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to
modify the fire alarm network on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent
of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of
the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.
E. Certifications:
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of
contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer and
trained on network applications.
1.06 GUARANTY:
A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free
from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least Two (2) years from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during these Two years period shall be included in the submittal bid.
1.07 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referenced in text
by the basic designation only.
A. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA 72 for protected premises signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system field
wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices.
B. Local and State Building Codes.
C. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
1.08 APPROVALS:
A. The system must have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized
agencies:
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc
FM Factory Mutual
MEA Material Equipment Acceptance (NYC)
CSFM California State Fire Marshal
Local Civil Defense Authorities
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL
A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire
alarm) system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer of the equipment shall be
responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system.
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams,
schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the
riser/connection diagram for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.
E710-3
C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly
in place. (e.g., detectors shall not be supported by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.
2.02 CONDUIT AND WIRE
A. Conduit:
1. Conduit shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local requirements. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent
of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single
conduit.
3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and
shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors,
per NEC Article 760-29.
4. Conduit shall not enter any FACP, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.
5. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum.
B. Wire:
1. All fire alarm system wiring must be new, unless specified herein.
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as
recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18
AWG (1.02 mm) for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits, and 16 AWG (1.32
mm) for notification appliance circuits.
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and approved by a recognized testing agency for use
with a protective signaling system.
4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit (if any) shall have a fire resistance rating suitable
for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR).
5. Wiring used for the signaling line circuit (SLC) multiplex communication loop shall be
twisted and shielded and installed in conduit unless specifically accepted by the fire alarm
equipment manufacturer.
6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised.
C. Network Media
1. General: The network shall be capable of communicating via wire. A wire network shall
include a fail safe means of isolating the nodes in the unlikely event of complete power
loss to a node. The fail safe design shall allow the network communications signal to bypass the failed node which allows the continuation of normal communications activity if
specified wiring distances are maintained.
2. Twisted Pair (wire) Communication: The dedicated twisted pair shall utilize 12 to 24 AWG
wire and support distances of up to 1,000 meter between nodes.
D. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets:
All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their intended purpose.
E. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, water flow).
Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to
intelligent reporting devices.
F. The FACP(s) shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire
alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 4 mm². The FACP cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod.
2.03 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS:
A. Each network FACP shall contain a microprocessor-based central processing unit (CPU). The
FACP shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up
the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, transponders, local and remote operator terminals, printers, annunciators, emergency voice communication systems, and other
system controlled devices.
Each FACP on the network shall perform the following functions:
1. Supervise and monitor all intelligent/addressable detectors and monitor modules connected to the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions.
E710-4
2. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility by way of
connection to transponders.
3. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed.
4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm, condition on operator's
terminal, panel display, and annunciators.
B. General FACP Operation
1. Each FACP node shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation
panel which shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual, color coded
system status LEDs, and an alpha-numeric keypad for field programming and control of
the node.
2. All programming or editing of the existing programing in the system shall be achieved
without special equipment or interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm
control panel.
3. The system shall include emergency voice communications utilizing distributed amplification and intelligence such that loss of operation by the main FACP will not result in the
loss of evacuation signal throughout the balance of the building.
4. Each FACP node shall be capable of providing the following features:
Block Acknowledge for Trouble Conditions
Rate Charger Control
Control-By-Time (Delay, Pulse, time of day, etc.)
Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Adjust (high/low)
Device Blink Control (turn of detector LED strobe)
Environmental Drift Compensation (selectable ON or OFF)
Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel
NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test
System Status Reports
Alarm Verification, by device, with tally
Multiple Printer Interface
Multiple CRT Display Interface
Non-Fire Alarm Module Reporting
Automatic NFPA 72 Detector Test
Programmable Trouble Reminder
Upload/Download System Database to PC Computer
One-Man Walk Test
Smoke Detector Maintenance Alert
Security Monitor Points
Alpha-numeric Pager Interface
On-line or Off-line programming
C. FACP Central Processing Unit (CPU):
1. Each FACP network node shall include a central processing unit. The CPU shall communicate with, monitor, and control all other modules within the control panel. Removal,
disconnection or failure of any control panel module shall be detected and reported to the
system display by the CPU.
2. Each CPU shall contain and execute all control-by-event interlock for specific local and
network action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Control-byevent programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost
even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.
3. The central processing unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of all
system displays. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail.
D. Loop Interface Board (LIB):
1. Loop interface boards shall be provided to monitor and control each of the Signaling Line
Circuit (SLC) loops in the network node. The loop interface board shall contain its own
microprocessor and shall be capable of operating in local mode in the case of a failure in
the main CPU of the control panel. In local mode, the loop interface board shall detect
alarms and activate output devices on its own SLC loop.
E710-5
E.
F.
G.
L.
M.
2. The LIB shall not require any jumper cuts or address switch settings to initialize SLC Loop
operations.
3. The loop interface board shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the intelligent detectors and addressable modules connected to its SLC Loop over a single pair of
wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of operation as NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7.
4. The LIB shall be able to drive two Style 4 SLC loops, each up to 3000 meters in length,
for an effective loop span of 6000 meters.
5. The loop interface board shall receive analog information from all detectors and shall process this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for
that particular detector. The loop interface board software shall include software to automatically adjust and compensate for dust accumulation to maintain detector performance
as it is affected by environmental factors. The analog information may also be used for
automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance
requirements.
6. The LIB shall communicate with each intelligent addressable detector and addressable
module on its SLC loop and verify proper device function and status. Communication with
up to 198 intelligent devices shall be performed every 6 seconds or less.
Enclosures:
1. Control panels shall be housed in UL-listed cabinets suitable for surface or semi-flush
mounting. Cabinets shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and
the manufacturer's standard finish.
2. The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions for electrical
conduit connections into the sides and top.
3. The door shall provide a key lock and include a transparent opening for viewing all indicators. For convenience, the door shall have the ability to be hinged on either the right or
left-hand side.
4. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion.
The CPU and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected by
voltage surges or line transients including RFI and EMI.
FACP Power Supplies:
1. Main power supplies shall operate on 230 VAC, 50Hz, and shall provide all necessary
power for the FACP.
2. Each main supply shall provide 3.0 amps of usable notification appliance power, using a
switching 24 VDC regulator.
3. The main power supply shall be expandable for additional notification appliance power in
3.0 ampere steps.
4. Each main power supply shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using
dual-rate charging techniques for fast battery recharge. It shall charge 60 Amp hour batteries within a 48-hour period.
5. The supply shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of detecting earth faults.
6. It shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current.
7. The main power supply shall be power-limited per UL864 requirements.
Field Charging Power Supply: The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24
volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances.
1. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It
shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby.
2. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be
a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs
(two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices.
3. The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox.
4. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per
NFPA requirements.
5. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per UL standards.
System Circuit Supervision:
E710-6
N.
O.
P.
Q.
1. Each FACP node shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, transponders, annunciators and peripheral equipment and annunciate loss of communications with these devices. The FACP CPU shall continuously scan the above devices for proper system operation and upon loss of response from a device shall sound an audible trouble, indicate
which device or devices are not responding and print the information on the printer.
Field Wiring Terminal Blocks
For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in type and have sufficient capacity for 18 (0.75 mm²) to 12 AWG (3.25 mm²) wire. Fixed terminal blocks are not acceptable.
Emergency Two-Way Telephone Control Switches/Indicators
1. The emergency telephone circuit control panel shall include visual indication of active and
trouble status for each telephone circuit in the system.
2. The telephone circuit control panel shall include switches to manually activate or deactivate each telephone circuit in the system.
Operators Terminal:
Provide the following functions in addition to any other functions required for the system.
1. Acknowledge (ACK/STEP) Switch:
a. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new Alarm
and/or trouble condition shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change
the system alarm or trouble LED from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If additional
new alarm or trouble conditions exist or are detected and reported in the system, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next alarm
or trouble condition.
b. Depressing the acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo
sounders.
2. Signal Silence Switch:
Activation of the signal silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm activation. The selection
of notification circuits and relays which are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field
programmable within the confines of all applicable standards.
3. System Reset Switch:
Activation of the system reset switch shall cause all local electronically-latched initiating
devices, software zones, output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition.
If an alarm condition(s) still exists, or if they reoccur in the system after system reset
switch activation, the system shall then resound the alarm conditions.
4. System Test Switch.
Activation of the system test switch shall initiate an automatic test of all intelligent/addressable detectors in the local system. The system test shall activate the electronics in each intelligent sensor, simulating an alarm condition and causing the transmission of the alarm condition from that sensor to the fire alarm control panel. The fire alarm
control panel shall interpret the data from each sensor installed in the system. A report
summarizing the results of this test shall be displayed automatically on the system LCD
and on any CRTs or printers in the system.
5. Lamp Test Switch:
Activation of the lamp test switch shall sequentially turn on all LED indicators, system liquid crystal display and local piezo signal, and then automatically return the fire alarm control panel to the previous condition.
Field Programming
1. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the
need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of
electronic integrated circuits.
2. All local FACP node programming shall be accomplished through the FACP keyboard or
through the video display terminal.
3. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
4. The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined specifically for the system when it is installed. Two levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level is used for status level changes such as
E710-7
zone disable or manual on/off commands. A second (higher-level) is used for actual
change of program information.
R. Specific System Operations
1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of
any or all analog intelligent detectors in the FACP node from each system keypad or from
the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within allowed UL limits.
2. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled for alarm verification. Each FACP shall keep a count
of the number of times each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters
may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.
3. System Point Operations
a. All devices in the FACP node may be enabled or disabled through the local keypad or
video terminal.
b. Any FACP node output point may be turned on or off from the local system keypad or
the video terminal.
4. Point Read: The FACP node shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic
functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point will be annunciated for
the parameters listed:
a. Device Status
b. Device Type
c. Custom Device Label
d. Software Zone Label
e. Device Zone Assignments
f. Detector Analog Value
g. All Program Parameters
5. System Status Reports: Upon command from a password-authorized operator of the system, a status report will be generated, and printed, listing all local FACP system status.
6. System History Recording and Reporting: Each FACP node shall contain a history buffer
that shall be capable of storing a minimum of 400 system events. Each local activation
will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation, until an
operator requests that the contents be either displayed or printed. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or printed.
The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems which use volatile memory for
history storage are not acceptable.
7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: Each FACP node shall automatically interrogate
each intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of
time.
If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above
normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular intelligent detector will be annunciated on the system display, network display and printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in
the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise
to perform.
2.04 NETWORK MONITORING DEVICES
A. INTELLIGENT NETWORK ANNUNCIATOR
1. An intelligent network annunciator shall be provided to display all system intelligent
points. The INA shall be capable of displaying all information for all 200,000 possible
points on the network. Network display devices which are only capable of displaying a
subset of network points shall not be suitable substitutes.
2. The INA shall include a minimum of 80 characters, backlit by a long life solid state LCD
display. The network display shall mount in any of the network node fire alarm control
panels. Optionally, the network display may mount in an attractive backbox designed for
this use, or may mount in an industry standard 19-inch (482.6 mm) rack. The network
shall support over 103 network display annunciators (not to exceed total node capacity)
and shall connect to the network over either a wire or fiber interface.
E710-8
3. The intelligent network annunciator shall have a history buffer capable of storing a minimum of 400 events in non-volatile memory.
4. The INA shall include two optically isolated, 2400 baud, industry standard EIA-232 ports
for UL864 listed printers and CRT's. These peripheral devices shall print or display network activity.
5. The intelligent network annunciator shall include five control switches for system wide
control of signal Silence, Reset, Activate Signals (Drill), and Lamp Test (local). A means
by which the controls switches are "locked out", such as a key, shall be available.
6. The INA shall include long life LEDs to display Power, Fire Alarm, Security Alarm, System
Trouble, Supervisory, Signals Silenced, and CPU Failure.
7. The intelligent network annunciator shall include two software assignable passwords, up
to five digits in length.
8. For time keeping purposes the INA shall include a time of day clock.
9. Each INA shall support up to 32 additional 80 character remote display annunciators for
displaying network activity. These "Terminal Mode" displays will mimic the activity appearing on the corresponding INA.
2.05 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - CONVENTIONAL
A. Programmable Electronic Sounders:
1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.
2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least
90 dBA measured at 10 feet (3 meters) from the device.
3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as show on plans.
B. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of UL and shall meet the following criteria:
1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second.
2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
C. Fire Man Telephone
1. The telephone cabinet shall be painted red and clearly labeled as cabinets shall be located where shown on drawings.
2. Handset cradle shall have a switch connection so that lifting cradle shall send a signal to
the NET WORK ANNUCIATOR.
3. On activating the remote phone, the phone earpiece shall sound at the master handset is
lifted.
4. The two-way emergency telephone system shall support a minimum of without degradation of the signal.
5. Provide one portable telephone handset.
2.06 SYSTEM COMPONENTS, INTELLIGENT
A. Addressable Devices - General
1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 0 to 9)
type address switches.
2. Addressable devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a Dip switch,
are not an allowable substitute.
3. Detectors shall be analog and addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the
FACP signaling line circuit.
4.
Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling
LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be
placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has
been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the
system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an
external remote alarm LED.
5. The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment through field programming. Sensitivity shall be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.
6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detec-
E710-9
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
tors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA
72, Chapter 7.
7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with
tamper proof feature.
8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition
and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector
itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control
panel.
9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use
to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on realtime measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal
decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program
and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector.
11. Addressable devices shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and
shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the
type of device. LED(s) shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel.
12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall
report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold.
Addressable Pull Box (manual station)
1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module
status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after
actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of
a key.
2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key
type reset.
3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions
provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised
letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.
Analog Photoelectric Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.
Analog Ionization Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of
combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion.
Analog Thermal Detectors
1. Thermal detectors shall be Analog addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit
(58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees
C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line
circuit.
Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm
control panel SLCs.
2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54
mm) deep electrical box.
3. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided
that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational
and in regular communication with the control panel.
4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package
and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7
mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.
Two Wire Detector Monitor Module
E710-10
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device).
2. The two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8
inch (54 mm) deep electrical box or with an optional surface backbox.
3. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall
be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
H. Addressable Control Module
1. Addressable control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of
one conventional NACs of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized audio/visual notification appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay.
2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8
inch (54 mm) deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox.
3. The control module NAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 amp
of inductive A/V signal, or 2 amps of resistive A/V signal operation, or as a dry contact
(Form-C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection
requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at
the same time on the same pair of wires.
4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power circuit from the
main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply.
5. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of
0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
I. Isolator Module
1. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an
SLC Class A or Class B branch. The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or
detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected
zone of the building.
2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.
3. The isolator module shall not require any address-setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its
normal operation.
4. The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4-inch (101.6 mm) deep electrical box or in
a surface mounted back box. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that
the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated.
J. Serially Connected Annunciator Requirements
1. The annunciator shall communicate to the fire alarm control node or INA via an EIA 485
(multi-drop) two wire communications loop. The FACP node shall support two 6,000 ft
(1828.8 m). EIA-485 wire runs. Up to 32 annunciators, each configured up to 64 points,
may be connected to connections, for a system capacity of 2,048 points of annunciation.
2. An EIA-485 repeater shall be available to extend the EIA-485 wire distance in 3,000 ft. increments. An optional (UL 864 listed) version shall allow the EIA-485 circuit to be transmitted over Fiber optics.
3. Annunciator switches may be programmed for system control such as, global
acknowledge, global signal silence, global system reset, and on/off control of any control
point in the system.
4. An optional module shall be available utilizing annunciator points to drive EIA-485 driven
relays. This shall extend the system point capacity by 2,048 remote contacts.
K. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator:
1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
E710-11
2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions from either the network node or complete network, via the INA.
3. Up to 32 LCD annunciators may be connected to a specific (terminal mode) EIA 485 interface. LCD annunciators shall not reduce the annunciation capacity of the system. Each
LCD shall include vital system wide functions such as, system acknowledge, silence and
reset.
4. LCD display annunciators shall mimic the local control panel 80-character display or network annunciator and shall not require special programming.
2.07 BATTERIES AND EXTERNAL CHARGER
A. Battery:
1. Batteries shall be 12 volt, Gell-Cell type.
2. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than
24 hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.
3. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level
checks for refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local codes, as shown on the
drawings, and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas
and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the
system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures
shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be
flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in
unfinished areas.
D. Manual Pull Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi flush mounting and shall
be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (1219 mm) above
the finished floor.
3.02 TYPICAL OPERATION:
A. Actuation of any manual station, smoke detector, heat detector or water flow switch shall
cause the following operations to occur unless otherwise specified:
1. Activate all programmed speaker circuits.
2. Actuate strobe units until the panel is reset.
3. Light the associated indicators corresponding to active speaker circuits.
4. Where required, return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
5. A smoke detector in any elevator lobby shall, in addition to the above functions, return all
elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
6. Smoke detectors in the elevator machine room or top of hoist way shall return all elevators in to the primary or alternate floor. Smoke detectors or heat detectors installed to shut
down elevator power shall do so in accordance with ANSI A17.1 requirements and be coordinated with the electrical contractor.
7. Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions, shut down the ventilation system or close associated control dampers as appropriate.
8. Activation of any sprinkler system low pressure switch, on valve tamper switch, shall
cause a system supervisory alarm indication.
B. HVAC/Smoke Control System Operation:
1. On/Auto/Off switches and status indicators (LEDS) shall be provided for monitoring and
manual control of each fan, damper, HVAC control unit, stairwell pressurization fan, and
smoke exhaust fan. To ensure compliance the units supplied shall meet the following UL
categories: UUKL, PAZX, UDTZ, QVAX as well as the requirements of NFPA 90A, HVAC,
and NFPA 92A & 92B, Smoke Control. The control System shall be field programmable
for either 90A operation or 92A/B operation to allow for future use and system expansion.
2. The OFF LED shall be Yellow, the ON LED shall be green, the Trouble/Fault LED shall be
Amber/Orange for each switch. The Trouble/Fault indicator shall indicate a trouble in the
E710-12
control and/or monitor points associated with that switch. In addition, each group of eight
switches shall have two LEDS and one momentary switch which allow the following functions: An Amber LED to indicate an OFF-NORMAL switch position, in the ON or OFF position; A Green LED to indicate ALL AUTO switch position; A Local Acknowledge/Lamp
Test momentary switch.
3. Each switch shall have the capability to monitor and control two addressable inputs and
two addressable outputs. In all modes, the ON and OFF indicators shall continuously follow the device status not the switch position. Positive feedback shall be employed to verify correct operation of the device being controlled. Systems that indicate on/off/auto by
physical switch position only are not acceptable.
4. All HVAC switches (i.e., limit switches, vane switches, etc.) shall be provided and installed
by the HVAC contractor.
5. It shall be possible to meet the requirements mentioned above utilizing wall mounted custom graphic annunciators if the project requires such.
3.03 TEST
The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer
of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of
the adjustments and tests for the system.
A. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
B. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
C. Verify activation of all flow switches.
D. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
E. Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
F. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
G. Open and short (wire only) network communications and verify that trouble signals are received at network annunciators or reporting terminals.
H. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
I. Ground signaling line circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
J. Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
K. Check alert tone and prerecorded voice message to all alarm notification devices.
L. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using walk
test.
M. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the
system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the
correct activation of the control points.
N. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be
consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items
as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity
monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
3.04 FINAL INSPECTION
A. At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
3.05 INSTRUCTION
A. Instruction shall be required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions
shall be provided.
B. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten
"Sequence of Operation."
---END---
E710-13
SECTION E725
SATELLITE & MASTER ANTENNA TV SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes television antennas; television distribution equipment; coordination with other
utilities.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Type satellite master antenna system.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Local TV channels and FM radio.
B. Signal at each outlet: should be at 60-80 dBv.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show installation
details, cable routing, and system configuration.
B. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection
requirements for each component.
C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.
D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and recommendations.
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of outlets, devices, and cable routing.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for setting and tuning channels, and for
basic trouble-shooting procedures.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years documented
experience.
1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of television equipment as per project contract from Date of
substantial Completion.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with utility company relocation of overhead of underground lines interfering with
construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
U
2.01 VHF ANTENNA
A. Product Description: Broadband UHF/VHF antenna for television channels required.
B. Antenna Type: 10 element Yagi type.
C. Gain: 13dB over tuned dipole.
D. Front-to-Back Ratio: 20dB, minimum.
E. Beam Width: 52 degrees vertical x 63 degrees horizontal minus 3 dB.
F. Return Loss: 17 dB, minimum over entire channel.
G. Construction: Tubular metal elements.
E725 - 1
H. Mounting Hardware: Suitable for stacking; minimum separation, 1/2 wavelength.
I. Wind Resistance: Withstand 100 mph, 160 kph wind.
2.02 SATELLITE EARTH STATION
A. Product Description: 1.8 meter satellite earth station.
B. Gain: 38.1 dBi at 10.75 GHz., 38.7 dBi at 11.75 GHz, 39.5 dBi at 12.75 GHz
C. Beamwidth (Half Power): less than 2 degrees.
D. VSWR: 1.3: 1, maximum.
A. Consolidated Consultants 16725 - 3
E. Cross polarization: should be over 27 dB.
F. Feeds: multi-feed polarization.
G. Construction: Aluminum 1.4 mm.
H. Mounting: Elevation (15-50) degrees over azimuth (0-360) degrees.
I. Wind load at a speed of wind by 216 km/h : min. 192 kg.
2.03 EARTH STATION DOWN CONVERTER
A. Product Description: Converter with frequency range of 10.7-11.7 & 11.7-12.75 GHz.
B. Output Frequency range: 950 to 2150 MHz.
C. Noise Temperature: 60 degrees K Maximum at 23 degrees C.
D. Overall Gain: 50-64 dB.
E. System noise figure: 0.3 dB.
F. Output/impedance: F connector/75 ohm.
G. Supply voltage: 11.5-9 v
H. Ambient temperature: -40 C to +60 C
I. Switching threshold: 14/16v/22 KHz
2.04 VHF PREAMPLIFIER
A. Product Description: Broadband pre-amplifier for channels required.
B. Impedance: 75 ohm.
C. Elements: 13
D. Gain: 13 dB, minimum.
E. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 3 db maximum.
F. Beam width: -/+ 18 degrees
G. Front to back ratio: > 25 dB
2.05 VHF/UHF AMPLIFIER
A. Product Description: One single channel UHF/ rest. VHF/UHF.
B. Impedance: 75 ohm.
C. Noise figure(VHF/UHF) : 4.
D. Maximum output level: 116 dB.
E. Input : 2.
F. Output : 1
G. Gain: 20 dB.
H. Noise: 4 db maximum.
2.06 TAP
A. Product Description: All-channel, back-matched tap.
B. Recessed, suitable for mounting with standard duplex receptacle wall plate,
C. Through Loss: 5 dB, maximum.
D. Directional Loss: 20 dB minimum.
E. Frequency range : 5-2400 MHz
F. Tap loss : 8.5 - 20 dB
G. Connector: F type coaxial connector.
2.07 ACTIVE SPLITTER
E725 - 2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Frequency range: 5-2400 MHz
Product Description: In-line, channel, back-matched splitter.
Through Loss: 3.5dB for two-way; 6.7dB for four-way.
Isolation: 10-20 dB.
Return loss: greater dB
2.08 CASCADABLE MULTI-SWITCH
A. 16 SAT –IF- polarization & terrestrial signal to 16 subscribers.
B. Uses the switching criteria 14/18 v & 0/22 KHz for input selection.
C. Terrestrial range is fully passive & allows reception without sat receiver.
D. Frequency range: terrestrial 47-862, SAT 950-2150.
E. Maximum output level: 100 dB.
F. Isolation: SAT/SAT H/V > 30 dB, SAT/Terr. >25 dB.
G. Tap loss: 5 dB for SAT, 20 dB for terrestrial.
H. Through loss: 2 dB for SAT & Terrestrial.
I. Control signal: 14/18 v & 0/22 KHz.
2.09 DISTRIBUTION CABLE
A. Main Distribution Cable: RG 6/U RF.
B. Branch Distribution Cable: RG 6/U RF.
2.10 SAT AMPLIFIERS
A. Gain: SAT line 32 dB, SAT tap 25 dB, terr. line 25 dB, terr. Tap 15 dB.
B. Maximum output level: max 114 dBmv for sat, max 114 dBmv for terrestrial.
C. Noise figure: 8 dB
D. Return Loss: 10 dB
2.11 EQUIPMENT RACK
A. Product Description: Surface-mounted cabinet with adequate ventilation.
B. Size: Selected by equipment manufacturer.
C. Cabinet Finish: Selected by equipment manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure signal level at each outlet.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Supervise final adjustments and tuning of system.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust each antenna using field strength meter to orient for maximum signal reception.
B. Adjust amplifier gain and make other system adjustments to achieve specified output levels at
each outlet.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Furnish 24 hours of instruction each for two persons, to be conducted at Project site with
manufacturer's representative.
B. It is the contractor responsibility to attain the right and accepted signal strength at every
TV outlet whether the signal is SAT and/or terrestrial (RF). It is the contractor responsibility to
decide the right amplifiers ratings where he needs to submit calculations regarding the losses and
how it is compensated by the amplifiers.
E725 - 3
---END---
E725 - 4
SECTION E729
SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS AND CCTV SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and install a complete Video Surveillance System, which is identified as the Closed
Circuit Television System hereinafter referred to as the CCTV System as specified in this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, installing, and the operation of the CCTV
System as shown. The Contractor shall also provide certification as required.
B. The security system shall be installed and tested to ensure all components are fully compatible as
a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems, whether the security
system is stand-alone or a part of a complete Information Technology (IT) computer network.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section E010, ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS,
submit the following:
B. Provide certificates of compliance with Section 1.3, Quality Assurance.
C. Provide a pre-installation and as-built design package in both electronic format and on paper,
minimum size 48 x 48 inches (1220 x 1220 millimeters); drawing submittals shall be per the
established project schedule.
D. Pre-installation design and as-built packages shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Index Sheet that shall:
a. Define each page of the design package to include facility name, building name, floor,
and sheet number.
b. Provide a list of all security abbreviations and symbols.
c. Reference all general notes that are utilized within the design package.
d. Specification and scope of work pages for all security systems that are applicable to the
design package that will:
1) Outline all general and job specific work required within the design package.
2) Provide a device identification table outlining device Identification (ID) and use for all
security systems equipment utilized in the design package.
2. Drawing sheets that will be plotted on the individual floor plans or site plans shall:
a. Include a title block as defined above.
b. Define the drawings scale in both standard and metric measurements.
c. Provide device identification and location.
d. Address all signal and power conduit runs and sizes that are associated with the design
of the electronic security system and other security elements (e.g., barriers, etc.).
e. Identify all pull box and conduit locations, sizes, and fill capacities.
f. Address all general and drawing specific notes for a particular drawing sheet.
3. A riser drawing for each applicable security subsystem shall:
a. Indicate the sequence of operation.
b. Relationship of integrated components on one diagram.
c. Include the number, size, identification, and maximum lengths of interconnecting wires.
d. Wire/cable types shall be defined by a wire and cable schedule. The schedule shall utilize
a lettering system that will correspond to the wire/cable it represents. This schedule shall
also provide the manufacturer’s name and part number for the wire/cable being installed.
4. A system drawing for each applicable security system shall:
a. Identify how all equipment within the system, from main panel to device, shall be laid out
and connected.
b. Provide full detail of all system components wiring from point-to-point.
c. Identify wire types utilized for connection, interconnection with associate security
subsystems.
E729-1
d. Show device locations that correspond to the floor plans.
e. All general and drawing specific notes shall be included with the system drawings.
5. A schedule for all of the applicable security subsystems shall be included. All schedules shall
provide the following information:
a. Device ID.
b. Device Location (e.g. site, building, floor, room number, location, and description).
c. Mounting type (e.g. flush, wall, surface, etc.).
d. Power supply or circuit breaker and power panel number.
e. In addition, for the CCTV Systems, provide the camera ID, camera type (e.g. fixed or
pan/tilt/zoom (P/T/Z), lens type (e.g. for fixed cameras only) and housing model number.
6. Detail and elevation drawings for all devices that define how they were installed and
mounted.
E. Pre-installation design packages shall be reviewed by the Contractor along with a owner
representative to ensure all work has been clearly defined and completed. All reviews shall be
conducted in accordance with the project schedule. There shall be four (4) stages to the review
process:
1. 35 percent
2. 65 percent
3. 90 percent
4. 100 percent
F. Provide manufacturer security system product cut-sheets. Submit for approval at least 30 days
prior to commencement of formal testing, a Security System Operational Test Plan. Include
procedures for operational testing of each component and security subsystem, to include
performance of an integrated system test.
G. Submit manufacture’s certification of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listing as specified.
Provide all maintenance and operating manuals.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. All equipment associated within the CCTV System shall be UL 3004 compliant and rated for
continuous operation. Environmental conditions (i.e. temperature, humidity, wind, and seismic
activity) shall be taken under consideration at each facility and site location prior to installation of
the equipment.
B. All equipment shall operate on 230 volts alternating current (VAC); 50 Hz AC power system
unless documented otherwise in subsequent sections listed within this specification. All
equipment shall have a back-up source of power that will provide a minimum of 96 hours of run
time in the event of a loss of primary power to the facility.
C. The system shall be designed, installed, and programmed in a manner that will allow for easy of
operation, programming, servicing, maintenance, testing, and upgrading of the system.
D. All equipment and materials for the system will be compatible to ensure correct operation.
2.02 EQUIPMENT ITEMS
A. CCTV system shall meet following requirements:
B. All Cameras will be EIA 330 and UL 983 compliant as well as:
1. Will be charge coupled device (CCD) cameras and shall conform to Pal formatting.
2. Fixed cameras shall be color and the primary choice for monitoring following the activities
described below.
3. Shall be powered by either 12 volts direct current (VDC) or 24 VAC. Power supplies shall be
Class 2 and UL compliant and have a back-up power source to ensure cameras are still
operational in the event of loss of primary power to the CCTV System.
4. Shall be rated for continuous operation under the following environmental conditions:
a. Ambient temperatures of minus 10 degrees C to 55 degrees C utilizing equipment that
will provide automatic heating and cooling.
E729-2
5.
6.
7.
8.
11.
12.
13.
14.
b. Humidity, wind gusts, ice loading, and seismic conditions specified or encountered for
locations where CCTV cameras will be utilized.
Each function and activity shall be addressed within the system by a unique twenty (20)
character user defined name. The use of codes or mnemonics identifying the CCTV action
shall not be accepted.
Shall come with built-in video motion detection that shall automatically monitor and process
information from each camera. The camera motion detection shall detect motion within the
camera's field of view and provide automatic visual, remote alarms, and motion-artifacts as a
result of detected motion as follows:
a. Motion-detection settings shall include adjustable object size and velocity, as well as a
selectable detection area of 132 zones in a twelve (12) x eleven (11) grid.
b. Sensors shall accept video signals from CCTV cameras and when synchronizing is
required, it shall be in composite synchronization.
c. Sensor processors shall detect motion by digitizing multiple pixels within each video
scene and by comparing the gray scale of the pixels to a previously stored reference. The
number of pixels digitized depends on the application. The designer of the system shall
consider cost effectiveness as a factor since digitizing a large number of pixels could
increase cost dramatically with little additional actual detection capability for a specific
application.
d. An alarm shall be initiated when the comparison varies by six (6) percent or more.
Appropriate signage shall be designed, provided, and posted that notifies people that an area
is under camera surveillance.
Shall be programmed to digitally flip from color to black and white at dusk and vise versa at
dawn.
Will be fitted with auto-iris lenses to ensure the image is maintained in low light.
Lightning protection shall be IEEE C62.41 compliant and provided for all cameras. Either
surge protectors or a lightning grid may be utilized. Ensure all lightning protection equipment
is compliant with Article 780 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). The use of Fuses and
Circuit Breakers as a means of lightning protection shall not be allowed.
If using the camera as part of a CCTV network a video encoder shall be used to convert the
signal from Pal to (H264) format.
Fixed Color Cameras Technical Characteristics:
Sensor
Type 1/3-inch CCD, WDR, dual shutter
Active Pixels (PAL) 752 x 582
Active Pixels (NTSC) 768 x 494
Video
Video compression H.264 (ISO/IEC 14496-10); M-JPEG,
JPEG
Data rate 9.6 Kbps to 6 Mbps
Resolution Horizontal x vertical (PAL/NTSC ips)
• 4CIF 704 x 576/480 (25/30 ips)
• CIF 352 x 288/240 (25/30 ips)
Overall IP Delay Min.120 ms, Max. 240 ms
GOP structure I, IP
Frame rate 1 to 50/60 (PAL/NTSC) H.264
1 to 25/30 (PAL/NTSC) M-JPEG
Video Out
E729-3
Signal Analog composite (NTSC or PAL) for service
Connector 2.5 mm jack, 75 Ohm
Horizontal resolution 540 TVL
Video S/N 50 dB
Optical
Varifocal lens IR corrected, manual zoom and focus adjustment
Iris control Automatic iris control
Viewing angle
2.8 to 10 mm Wide 100.8 x 73.7º (H x V)
Tele 28.5º x 21.4º (H x V)
9 to 22 mm Wide: 31.2º x 22.8º (H x V)
Tele: 12.8º x 9.6º (H x V )
Mechanical
Weight 0.67 kg (1.48 lb)
+SMB: 1.29 kg (2.84 lb)
Mounting Flush mount or surface mount
Color White (RAL9010) trim ring with black inner liner
Adjustment range 360º pan, 90º tilt, ±90º azimuth
Dome bubble Polycarbonate, clear with UV blocking antiscratch coating
Trim ring Aluminum
C. Lenses: Shall be utilized in a manner that provides maximum coverage of the area being
monitored by the camera. The lenses shall:
1. Be 1/3” to fit CCD fixed camera.
2. Be all glass with coated optics.
3. Have mounts that are compatible with the camera selected.
4. Be packaged and supplied with the camera.
5. Have a maximum f-stop of f/1.3 for fixed lenses, and a maximum f-stop of f/1.6 for variable
focus lenses.
6. Be equipped with an auto-iris mechanism.
7. Have sufficient circle of illumination to cover the image sensor evenly.
8. Not be used on a camera with an image format larger than the lens is designed to cover.
9. Be provided with pre-set capability.
D. Two types of lenses shall be utilized for both interior and exterior fixed cameras:
1. Manual Variable Focus
2. Auto Iris Fixed
E. Auto Iris Fixed
1. Shall be utilized in areas where a small specific point of reference is to be monitored.
Examples of this are doorways, elevators, cashier booths, etc.
2. To determine the exact size of the fixed lens required, complete a focal length calculation
using either a focal length calculator or a focal length chart provided by the product
manufacturer.
3. Technical Characteristics:
Image format
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
1/3 inch
Focal length
2.8 mm
4 mm
8 mm
Iris range
F1.2 – 200
E729-4
F1.2 – 200
F1.2 - 200
Min. Object
Lens mount
Angle of view
Focus control
0.3 m (1 ft)
CS-mount
94 X 72
Manual
0.3 m (1 ft)
CS-mount
64 X 49
Manual
0.3 m (1 ft)
CS-mount
33 x 25
manual
F. Video Display Equipment
1. Will consist of color monitors and shall be EIA 375A compliant.
2. Shall be able to display analog, digital, and other images in either Pal or MPEG format
associated with the operation of the Security Management System (SMS).
3. Shall:
a. Have front panel controls that provide for power on/off, horizontal and vertical hold,
brightness, and contrast.
b. Accept multiple inputs, either directly or indirectly.
c. Have the capabilities to observe and program the CCTV System.
d. Be installed in a manner that they cannot be witnessed by the general public.
5. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Flat Panel Display Monitor
a. Technical Characteristics:
Sync Format
PAL/NTSC
LCD Panel
TFT LCD
Resolution
1280 x 1024 pixels; 500 TV
Contrast Ratio (CR)
500:1
Viewing Angle
140° horizontal, 130° vertical
Video Input
(CVBS)
1.0 Vp-p (0.5–1.5 Vp-p),
75 Ohm Y/C (S-video) 0.7 Vp-p,
0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ohm
Video 1
Composite video two (2) BNC (1 in, 1
out)
Video 2
Composite video two (2) BNC (1 in, 1
out)
Y/C (S-video)
two (2) mini-dins, 4-pin (1 in, 1 out)
G. Camera Housings and Mounts:
1. This section pertains to all interior and exterior housings, domes, and applicable wall, ceiling,
corner, pole, and rooftop mounts associated with the housing. Housings and mounts shall be
specified in accordance to the type of cameras used.
2. All cameras and lenses shall be enclosed in a tamper resistant housing. Any additional
mounting hardware required to install the camera housing at its specified location shall be
provided along with the housing.
3. The camera and lens contained inside the housing shall be installed on a camera mount. All
additional mounting hardware required to install the camera housing at its specified location
shall be provided along with the housing.
4. Environmentally Sealed
a. Shall:
1) Be designed in manner that it provides a condensation free environment for correct
camera operation.
2) Operate in a 100 percent condensing humidity atmosphere.
3) Be constructed in a manner that:
a) Has a fill valve to allow for the introduction of nitrogen into the housing to
eliminate existing atmospheric air and pressurize the housing to create moisture
free conditions.
b) Has an overpressure valve to prevent damage to the housing in the event of over
pressurization.
E729-5
c) Is equipped with a humidity indicator that is visible to the eye to ensure correct
atmospheric conditions at all times.
d) The leak rate of the housing is not to be greater than 13.8kPa or 2 pounds per
square inch at sea level within a 90 day period.
e) It shall contain camera mounts or supports as needed to allow for correct
positioning of the camera and lens.
f) The housing and sunshield are to be white in color.
b. All electrical and signal cables required for correct operations shall be supplied in a
hardened carrier system from the controller to the camera.
c. The mounting bracket shall be adjustable to allow for the housing weight of the camera
and the housing unit it is placed in.
d. Accessibility to the camera and mounts shall be taken into consideration for maintenance
and service purposes.
6. Indoor Mounts
a. Ceiling Mounts:
1) This enclosure and mount shall be installed in a finished or suspended ceiling.
2) The enclosure and mount shall be fastened to the finished ceiling, and shall not
depend on the ceiling tile grid for complete support.
b. Wall Mounts:
1) The enclosure shall be installed in manner that it matches the existing décor and
placed at a height that it will be unobtrusive, unable to cause personal harm, and
prevents tampering and vandalism.
2) The mount shall contain a manual pan/tilt head that will provide 360 degrees of
horizontal and vertical positioning from a horizontal position, and has a locking bar or
screw to maintain its fixed position once it has been adjusted.
7. Interior Domes
a. The interior dome shall be a pendant mount, pole mount, ceiling mount, surface mount,
or corner mounted equipment.
b. The lower portion of the dome that provides camera viewing shall be made of black
opaque acrylic and shall have a light attenuation factor of no more that 1 f-stop.
c. The housing shall be equipped with integral pan/tilt capabilities complete with wiring,
wiring harness, connectors, receiver/driver, pan/tilt control system, pre-position cards, or
any other hardware and equipment as needed to fully provide a fully functional pan/tilt
dome.
9. Exterior Wall Mounts
a. Shall have an adjustable head for mounting the camera.
b. Shall be constructed of aluminum, stainless steel, or steel with a corrosion-resistant
finish.
c. The head shall be adjustable for not less than plus and minus 90 degrees of pan, and not
less than plus and minus 45 degrees of tilt. If the bracket is to be used in conjunction with
a pan/tilt, the bracket shall be supplied without the adjustable mounting head, and shall
have a bolt-hole pattern to match the pan/tilt base.
d. Shall be installed at a height that allows for maximum coverage of the area being
monitored.
H. Controlling Equipment
1. Shall be utilized to call up, operate, and program all cameras associated CCTV System
components.
2. Will have the ability to operate the cameras locally and remotely. A digital video recorder or a
network server shall be utilized as the CCTV System controller.
3. The controller shall be able to fit into a standard 19” (47.5 cm) equipment rack.
4. Control and programming keyboards shall be provided with its own type of switcher. All
keyboards shall:
a. Be located at each monitoring station.
b. Be addressable for programming purposes.
c. Provide interface between the operator and the CCTV System.
E729-6
I.
d. Provide full control and programming of the switcher.
e. Have the minimum following controls:
1) Programming
2) Switching
3) Lens function
4) P/T/Z
5) Environmental housing
6) Annotation
Recording Devices
1. All cameras on the CCTV System shall be recorded in real time using a Digital Video
Recorder (DVR),. The type of recording device utilized should be determined by the size and
type of CCTV System designed and installed, and to what extent the system is to be utilized.
2. All recording devices shall be 19“(47.5 cm) rack-mountable.
3. All DVR’s are viewable over an Intranet or Internet will be routed through an encryptor.
Encryptors shall:
a. Comply with FIPS PUB 140-2.
b. Support TCP/IP.
c. Directly interfaces to low-cost commercial routers.
d. Provide packet-based crypto synchronization.
e. Encrypt source and destination IP addresses.
f. Support web browser based management requiring no additional software.
g. Have a high data sustained throughput — 1.544 Mbps (T1) full duplex data rate.
h. Provide for both bridging and routing network architecture support.
i. Support Electronic Key Management System (EKMS) compatible.
j. Have remote management ability.
k. Automatically reconfigure when secure network or wide area network changes.
4. Digital Video Recorder (DVR):
a. Shall record video to a hard drive-based digital storage medium in H264 format.
b. Shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1) Record at minimum rate of 25 images per second (IPS).
2) Have a minimum to 16 looping inputs.
3) Have a minimum of eight (8) to 16 alarm inputs and two (2) relay outputs.
4) Shall provide instantaneous playback of all recorded images.
5) Be IP addressable, if part of a CCTV network.
6) Have built-in digital motion detection with masking and sensitivity adjustments.
7) Provide easy playback and forward/reverse search capabilities.
8) Complete audit trail database, with minimum of a six-month history that tracks all
events related to the alarm; specifically who, what, where and when.
9) DVR management capability providing automatic video routing to a back-up spare
recorder in case of failure.
10) Accessible locally and remotely via the Internet, Intranet, or a personal digital
assistant (PDA).
11) Records all alarm events in real time, ensuring 60 seconds before and after the event
are included in the recording.
12) Utilize RS-232 or fiber optic connections for integration with the SMS computer
station via a remote port on a network hub.
13) Allow for independently adjustable frame rate settings.
c. Technical Characteristics:
i. Playback Requirements:
1. The hybrid DVR shall allow playback of the stored video in the
forward or reverse direction, frame by frame, and from beginning
or end of the clip using standard VCR-like buttons. Reviewed
video clips or still images can be zoomed in or out. The images
can be sent to a printer connected to the parallel port of the local
recorder or to a network printer. An image displayed in the image
window can be saved as a single JPEG, BMP, or HTML file.
E729-7
2. The hybrid DVR shall have an instant playback function that
allows instant recall of recorded images from 10 to 300 seconds
in the past to be replayed at the same rate the images were
recorded. Live images continue to be simultaneously displayed
along with the recorded images.
ii. Exporting Video Images:
1. The hybrid DVR will be capable of exporting video clips to the
CD/DVD drive or network drive.
a. Images can be exported along with a stand-alone player.
Playback of the exported images with the player will be
possible from any Windows based PC. This proprietary
format provides video authentication to assure that
images are not altered in any way.
b. Images can also be exported in a format that can be
played back with a default software program such as
Windows Media Player.
2. The DVR shall provide an export video scheduler function that
allows previous days recorded video to be exported for back up
to a designated target drive. Images from the current day can
also be exported up to the time that the export program job is
activated.
iii. Remote Access
1. The hybrid DVR will support login of users in LDAP (Lightweight
Directory Access Protocol) groups.
2. The hybrid DVR will provide embedded Internet Web Browser
access that allows up to five (5) remote PCs using Windows
Explorer 6.0 or higher to communicate with the recorder via a
network. The browser will be a secure connection using log-on
and authorization levels during transmission. From the remote
site using the browser, the live video images will be displayed in
single or multi-screen format; video displayed as single screen
sequences; status of the inputs will be displayed; remote relays
will be controllable; and compatible P/T/Z cameras will be
controllable.
3. Optional remote receiver software programs will be available
from the specified digital recorder manufacturer that will operate
on a remote Windows XP based PC. Operation of these remote
receiver software programs will require installation of a
manufacturer supplied Dongle key to the remote PC.
4. The optional remote receiver shall have the ability to display the
database information from a DVR.
5. The optional remote receiver shall be able to receive and record
alarm video from the DVR to its local drive
iv. Alarm and Trigger Input Capability
1. The hybrid DVR will be capable of automatically displaying
incoming camera alarms, with the option of displaying alarms
when in playback mode. The DVR will also allow the option to
manually acknowledge an alarm to silence, or to delete an alarm.
All alarm acknowledgements and deletions will be saved to a log
file.
2. The hybrid DVR will be capable of hiding a camera during
normal operation, only to display the camera during an alarm
when the camera is part of the alarm.
3. The hybrid DVR will have the capability to send an e-mail
notification on the following events: an alarm, motion detection,
video loss, or a reference image check failure.
E729-8
4. The hybrid DVR will be capable of handling up to 32 N/O or N/C
alarm inputs and providing up to 16 relay outputs where 1 of
those relays will be designated as a malfunction relay.
5. The hybrid DVR will be capable of recording pre-alarm video on
an alarm or motion detection for a time period from 0 to 120
seconds. Post alarm recording time will be selectable from 0 to
999 seconds. The DVR will be capable of having pre and post
alarm video recorded from the analog and compatible MPEG4
and JPEG cameras.
6. The hybrid DVR will be capable of transmitting live video images
via a network upon an alarm or triggered event to a remote
location(s) that is running the specified manufacturer’s DVR
remote software program. The DVR will maintain a list of remote
sites in order of priority so that an attempt is made to establish
communication with the first site on the list. If the attempt fails,
the DVR will move to the next remote site on the list to establish
connection. Once communication is established, the DVR will
initially alert the operator at the remote station via a flashing icon
and audible tone (or selected wav file) that an alarm has
occurred. The operator will then have the option to acknowledge
the alarm and display the live video at the workstation. The DVR
will also have the capability to be programmed to establish
communication with multiple remote sites upon an alarm.
7. The hybrid DVR will provide motion detection sensing of the
connected analog cameras. Sensitive areas of the camera’s field
of view may be programmed within the DVR. The DVR will also
react to Bosch IP cameras and encoders on the network that
have been programmed to detect video motion.
8. The hybrid DVR will be capable of automatically commanding
Bosch AutoDome pan/tilt/zoom cameras to move to
preprogrammed preset positions.
9. The hybrid DVR will provide 32 virtual alarm inputs that can be
controlled via the browser interface to execute preprogrammed
jobs within the DVR such as controlling relay outputs, camera
sequences, alarm recording, etc.
10. The hybrid DVR will interface to a Bosch G-Series Alarm Panel
via an RS232 interface.
v. DVR Setup and Configuration
1. The hybrid DVR will provide the following two methods of system
setup and configuration:
a. A Quick Configuration Wizard will be provided and
intended for the inexperienced user who must create a
basic system configuration and operate the recorder in a
minimum amount of time. The quick configuration will
allow setup of the following system parameters:
i. Time and date.
ii. Authorization levels and users.
iii. Network settings including the capability to limit
the bandwidth to a value that the system does
not exceed.
iv. Display analog cameras that were automatically
detected during the initial startup of the
configuration wizard.
E729-9
v. A graphical time planner to allow the record
rates, quality of recording, and type of recording
to be assigned to specific days of the week and
times.
vi. A dialog box to determine the type of recordings,
rate of recording, and quality of recording
desired including up to 30 minutes of pre-alarm
recording.
b. A Default (customized) Configuration shall be provided
to allow for programming of more complex applications
of the specified DVR. A configuration menu will be
displayed in a Windows tree format to allow the user to
create the system configuration setup by going from top
to bottom of the menu and making the corresponding
entries in the dialog boxes. The Default Configuration
will provide, but not be limited to, the following
configuration selections:
i. Connection and disconnection of local and
network hard drives. Displays total storage
capacity, used storage capacity, and available
storage.
ii. Provides an overview of the local recorder
including cameras and audio inputs. Allows
addition, deletion, editing of cameras and audio
inputs, including JPEG and MPEG4 IP cameras,
pre-position, and setup of pre-position scenes,
motion detection, and sequence programming
for two analog monitors.
iii. Recording setup – On a camera by camera
basis, allows setup of IPS rate and type of
recording such as continuous, motion, or alarm.
Time profiles can be assigned to these setups.
iv. Graphical time planner provides eight profiles
that can be assigned to any day of the week,
holiday, or special day.
v. The
recorder
provides
activation
and
deactivation of up to 32 N/O or N/C alarm
contacts to the input. Up to 16 relay outputs will
be available at the local station that can be
activated from a manufacturer provided remote
station software package or via a browser. A
malfunction relay is also provided. Four alarm
inputs can be used for alarm simulation
purposes.
vi. The recorder can be compatible with the Bosch
G Series Panel to allow selection of up to 32
software inputs from the panel.
vii. Jobs may be created that are started by input
triggers, cameras using motion detection, or a
virtual input. Jobs can also be assigned a time
profile. Jobs created can 1) control up to 4 dome
cameras 2) control relay outputs 3) control
camera sequences for two analog monitors and
4) start alarm recording.
viii. Allow setup of connection between local
recorder and remote stations.
E729-10
ix. The DVR specified will transmit images and/or
messages to other locations upon an alarm or
trigger event.
x. Video authentication.
2. The hybrid DVR will support an optional feature that allows the
hybrid DVR to:
a. Integrate with a Bosch ATM/POS Bridge.
b. Connect to an IP server that sends data (for example a
POS server) and to record this data as metadata along
with the camera image.
J.
Wires and Cables
1. Shall meet or exceed the manufactures recommendation for power and signal.
2. Will be carried in an enclosed conduit system, utilizing electromagnetic tubing (EMT) to
include the equivalent in flexible metal, rigid galvanized steel (RGS) to include the equivalent
of liquid tight, polyvinylchloride (PVC) schedule 40 or 80.
3. All conduits will be sized and installed per the NEC. All security system signal and power
cables that traverse or originate in a high security office space will contained in either EMT or
RGS conduit.
4. All conduit, pull boxes, and junction boxes shall be clearly marked with colored permanent
tape or paint that will allow it to be distinguished from all other conduit and infrastructure.
5. Conduit fills shall not exceed 50 percent unless otherwise documented.
6. A pull string shall be pulled along and provided with signal and power cables to assist in
future installations.
7. At all locations where there is a wall penetration or core drilling is conducted to allow for
conduit to be installed, fire stopping materials shall be applied to that area
8. High voltage and signal cables shall not share the same conduit and shall be kept separate
up to the point of connection. High voltage for the security system shall be defined as any
cable or sets of cables carrying 30 VDC/VAC or higher.
9. For all equipment that is carrying digital data between the Access Control System and
Database Management or at a remote monitoring station, shall not be less that 20 AWG and
stranded copper wire for each conductor. The cable or each individual conductor within the
cable shall have a shield that provides 100% coverage. Cables with a single overall shield
shall have a tinned copper shield drain wire.
10. All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cables, that act as a control, communication, or
signal lines shall include surge protection. Surge protection shall be furnished at the
equipment end and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application
on each wire line circuit shall be installed within one (1) m. of the building cable entrance. The
inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal and common mode using the following
wave forms:
a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak
voltage of 1500 watts and peak current of 60 amperes.
b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width wave form with a peak
voltage of 1000 volts and peak current of 500 amperes.
11. The surge suppression device shall not attenuate or reduce the video or sync signal under
normal conditions. Fuses and relays shall not be used as a means of surge protection.
12. Coaxial Cables
a. All video signal cables for the CCTV System, with exception to the PoE cameras, shall be
a coaxial cable and have a characteristic impedance of 75 ohms plus or minus 3 ohms.
b. For runs up to 750 feet use of an RG-59/U is required. The RG-59/U shall be shielded
which provides a minimum of 95 percent coverage, with a stranded copper center
conductor of a minimum 23 AWG, polyethylene insulation, and black non-conductive
polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.
c. For runs between 750 feet and 1250 feet, RG-6/U is required. RG-6/U shall be shielded
which provides a minimum of 95 percent coverage, with a stranded copper center
conductor of a minimum 18 AWG, polyethylene insulation, and black non-conductive
polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.
E729-11
d. For runs of 1250 to 2750 feet, RG-11/U is required. RG-11/U shall be shielded which
provides a minimum of 95 percent coverage, with a stranded copper center conductor of
a minimum 14 AWG, polyethylene insulation, and black non-conductive polyvinylchloride
(PVC) jacket.
e. All runs greater than 2750 feet will be substituted with a fiber optic cable. If using fiber
optics as a signal carrier then the following equipment will be utilized:
1) Multimode fiber optic cable a minimum size of 62 microns
2) Video transmitter, installed at the camera that utilizes 12 VDC or 24 VAC for power.
3) Video receiver, installed at the switcher.
f. RG-59/U Technical Characteristics
AWG
Stranding
Conductor Diameter
Conductor Material
Insulation Material
Insulation Diameter
Outer Shield Type
Outer Jacket Material
Overall Nominal Diameter
UL Temperature Rating
Nom. Characteristic Impedance
Nom. Inductance
Nom. Capacitance
Nom. Velocity of Propagation
Nom. Delay
Nom. Conductor DC Resistance @
20°C
Nom. Outer Shield DC Resistance
@ 20°C
Max. Operating Voltage
22
7x29
.031 in.
BCC
Gas-injected FHDPE
.145 in.
Braid/Braid
PVC
.242 in.
75°C
75 Ohms
0.094 μH/ft
Conductor to Shield 17.0 pF/ft
80 %
1.3 ns/ft
12.2 Ohms/1000 ft
2.4 Ohms/1000 ft
UL 300 V RMS
14. Power Cables
a. Will be sized accordingly and shall comply with the NEC. High voltage power cables will
be a minimum of three conductors, 14 AWG, stranded, and coated with a non-conductive
polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket. Low voltage cables will be a minimum of 18 AWG,
stranded and non-conductive polyvinylchloride (PVC) jacket.
b. Will be utilized for all components of the CCTV System that require 220 VAC 50 Hz
input. Each feed will be connected to a dedicated circuit breaker at a power panel that is
primarily for the security system.
c. All equipment connected to AC power shall be protected from surges. Equipment
protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41. Fuses shall
not be used as a means of surge protection.
d. Shall be rated for 220 VAC, 50 Hz, and shall comply with VA Low Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables (600 Volts and Below).
e. Low Voltage Power Cables
1) Shall be a minimum of 18 AWG, Stranded and have a polyvinylchloride outer jacket.
2) Cable size shall determined using a basic voltage over distance calculation and shall
comply with the NEC’s requirements for low voltage cables.
E729-12
2.03 INSTALLATION KIT
A. General:
1. The kit shall be provided that, at a minimum, includes all connectors and terminals, labeling
systems, audio spade lugs, barrier strips, punch blocks or wire wrap terminals, heat shrink
tubing, cable ties, solder, hangers, clamps, bolts, conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray, etc.,
required to accomplish a neat and secure installation. All wires shall terminate in a spade lug
and barrier strip, wire wrap terminal or punch block. Unfinished or unlabeled wire connections
shall not be allowed. All unused and partially opened installation kit boxes, coaxial, fiberoptic, and twisted pair cable reels, conduit, cable tray, and/or cable duct bundles, wire rolls,
physical installation hardware shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer. The following
sections outline the minimum required installation sub-kits to be used:
2. System Grounding:
a. The grounding kit shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All head end
equipment and power supplies shall be connected to earth ground via internal building
wiring, according to the NEC.
b. This includes, but is not limited to:
1) Coaxial Cable Shields
2) Control Cable Shields
3) Data Cable Shields
4) Equipment Racks
5) Equipment Cabinets
6) Conduits
7) Cable Duct blocks
8) Cable Trays
9) Power Panels
10) Grounding
11) Connector Panels
3. Coaxial Cable: The coaxial cable kit shall include all coaxial connectors, cable tying straps,
heat shrink tabbing, hangers, clamps, etc., required to accomplish a neat and secure
installation.
4. Wire and Cable: The wire and cable kit shall include all connectors and terminals, audio
spade lugs, barrier straps, punch blocks, wire wrap strips, heat shrink tubing, tie wraps,
solder, hangers, clamps, labels etc., required to accomplish a neat and orderly installation.
5. Conduit, Cable Duct, and Cable Tray: The kit shall include all conduit, duct, trays, junction
boxes, back boxes, cover plates, feed through nipples, hangers, clamps, other hardware
required to accomplish a neat and secure conduit, cable duct, and/or cable tray installation in
accordance with the NEC and this document.
6. Equipment Interface: The equipment kit shall include any item or quantity of equipment,
cable, mounting hardware and materials needed to interface the systems with the identified
sub-system(s) according to the OEM requirements and this document.
7. Labels: The labeling kit shall include any item or quantity of labels, tools, stencils, and
materials needed to correctly label each subsystem according to the OEM requirements, asinstalled drawings, and this document.
8. Documentation: The documentation kit shall include any item or quantity of items, computer
discs, as installed drawings, equipment, maintenance, and operation manuals, and OEM
materials needed to correctly provide the system documentation as required by this
document and explained herein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. System installation shall be in accordance with NECA 303, manufacturer and related documents
and references, for each type of security subsystem designed, engineered and installed.
B. Components shall be configured with appropriate “service points” to pinpoint system trouble in
less than 30 minutes.
E729-13
C. The Contractor shall install all system components including Government furnished equipment,
and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, documentation listed in
Sections 1.4 and 1.5 of this document, and shall furnish all necessary connectors, terminators,
interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system.
D. The CCTV System will be designed, engineered, installed, and tested to ensure all components
are fully compatible as a system and can be integrated with all associated security subsystems,
whether the system is a stand alone or a complete network.
E. For integration purposes, the CCTV System shall be integrated where appropriate with the
following associated security subsystems:
1. PACS:
a. Provide 24 hour coverage of all entry points to the perimeter and agency buildings, as
well as all emergency exits utilizing a fixed color camera.
b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis.
c. Be programmed go into an alarm state when an emergency exit is opened, and notify the
Access Control System and Database Management of an alarm event.
d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the PACS, refer to Section 28
13 11, PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS.
2. IDS:
a. Provide a recorded alarm event via a color camera that is connected to the IDS system
by either direct hardwire or a security system computer network.
b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis.
c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an IDS device is put into an alarm state,
and notify the.
d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the IDS, refer to Master
Specification 28 16 11.
3. Security Access Detection:
a. Provide full coverage of all vehicle and lobby entrance screening areas utilizing a fixed
color camera.
b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis.
c. The CCTV System should have facial recognition software to assist in identifying
individuals for current and future purposes.
d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the Security Access
Detection, refer to Master Specification 28 13 53.
4. EPPS:
a. Provide a recorded alarm event via a color camera that is connected to the EPPS system
by either direct hardwire or a security system computer network.
b. Record cameras on a 24 hours basis.
c. Be programmed to go into an alarm state when an emergency call box or duress
alarm/panic device is activated, and notify the Access Control System and Database
Management of an alarm event.
d. For additional CCTV System requirements as they relate to the EPPS, refer to Master
Specification 28 26 00.
F. Integration with these security subsystems shall be achieved by computer programming or the
direct hardwiring of the systems.
G. For programming purposes refer to the manufacturers requirements for correct system
operations. Ensure computers being utilized for system integration meet or exceed the minimum
system requirements outlined on the systems software packages.
H. A complete CCTV System shall be comprised of, but not limited to, the following components:
1. Cameras
2. Lenses
3. Video Display Equipment
4. Camera Housings and Mounts
5. Controlling Equipment
6. Recording Devices
7. Wiring and Cables
E729-14
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
The Contractor shall visit the site and verify that site conditions are in agreement/compliance with
the design package. The Contractor shall report all changes to the site or conditions that will
affect performance of the system to the Contracting Officer in the form of a report. The Contractor
shall not take any corrective action without written permission received from the Contracting
Officer.
Enclosure Penetrations: All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom of the enclosure
unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior
enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior
enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water and will
comply with VA Master Specification 07 84 00, Firestopping. The conduit riser shall terminate in a
hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved
sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer and in such a manner that the cable is not
damaged.
Cold Galvanizing: All field welds and brazing on factory galvanized boxes, enclosures, and
conduits shall be coated with a cold galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by
weight.
Interconnection of Console Video Equipment: The Contractor shall connect signal paths between
video equipment as specified by the OEM. Cables shall be as short as practicable for each signal
path without causing strain at the connectors. Rack mounted equipment on slide mounts shall
have cables of sufficient length to allow full extension of the slide rails from the rack.
Cameras:
1. Install the cameras with the focal length lens as indicated for each zone.
2. Connect power and signal lines to the camera.
3. Set cameras with fixed iris lenses to the f-stop to give full video level.
4. Aim camera to give field of view as needed to cover the alarm zone.
5. Aim fixed mounted cameras installed outdoors facing the rising or setting sun sufficiently
below the horizon to preclude the camera looking directly at the sun.
6. Focus the lens to give a sharp picture (to include checking for day and night focus and image
quality) over the entire field of view; and synchronize all cameras so the picture does not roll
on the monitor when cameras are selected. Dome cameras shall have all preset positions
defined and installed.
Monitors:
1. Install the monitors as shown and specified in design and construction documents.
2. Connect all signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.
3. Terminate video input signals as required.
4. Connect the monitor to AC power.
Video Recording Equipment:
1. Install the video recording equipment as shown in the design and construction documents,
and as specified by the OEM.
2. Connect video signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.
3. Connect alarm signal inputs and outputs as shown and specified.
4. Connect video recording equipment to AC power.
Camera Housings, Mounts, and Poles:
1. Install the camera housings and mounts as specified by the manufacturer and as shown,
provide mounting hardware sized appropriately to secure each camera, housing and mount
with maximum wind and ice loading encountered at the site.
2. Provide a foundation for each camera pole as specified and shown.
3. Provide a ground rod for each camera pole and connect the camera pole to the ground rod
as specified in Division 26 of the VA Master Specification and the VA Electrical Manual 730.
4. Provide electrical and signal transmission cabling to the mount location via a hardened carrier
system from the Access Control System and Database Management to the device.
5. Connect signal lines and AC power to the housing interfaces.
6. Connect pole wiring harness to camera.
System Start-Up
1. The Contractor shall not apply power to the CCTV System until the following items have been
completed:
E729-15
a. CCTV System equipment items and have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
b. A visual inspection of the CCTV System has been conducted to ensure that defective
equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections.
c. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated.
d. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as installed
and connected as indicated.
e. Power supplies to be connected to the CCTV System have been verified as the correct
voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated.
2. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of
Contractor work efforts.
R. Supplemental Contractor Quality Control
1. The Contractor shall provide the services of technical representatives who are familiar with all
components and installation procedures of the installed CCTV System; and are approved by
the Contracting Officer.
2. The Contractor will be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial phases of
quality control to provide technical assistance.
3. The Contractor shall also be available on an as needed basis to provide assistance with
follow-up phases of quality control.
4. The Contractor shall participate in the testing and validation of the system and shall provide
certification that the system installed is fully operational as all construction document
requirements have been fulfilled.
---END---
E729-16
SECTION E738
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. EIA/TIA 568 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association) Commercial Building Telecommunication Wiring Standard.
B. EIA/TIA 569 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association)Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
C. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pathways.
2. UTP cabling.
3. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling.
4. Coaxial cable.
5. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.
6. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
7. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.
8. Cabling system identification products.
9. Cable management system
10. Manufacturers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section E740 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling
2. Section E813 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data
cabling associated with system panels and devices.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated bottom or solidbottom channel.
D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from
building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.
E. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
H. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by
individual transverse members (rungs).
I. LAN: Local area network.
J. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several
telecommunications outlet/connectors.
K. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable
terminates.
L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
M. Solid-Bottom or Non-ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side
rails and a bottom without ventilation openings.
E738-1
N. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a
bottom having openings for the passage of air.
O. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.05 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between
the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the
communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called
"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.
1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications
outlet/connectors be installed for each work area.
2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation
point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications
outlet/connector.
3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.
B. A work area is approximately 9.3 sq. m, and includes the components that extend from the
telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.
C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 90 m. This maximum allowable length does not
include an allowance for the length of 4.9 m to the workstation equipment. The maximum
allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 4.9 m in the horizontal crossconnect.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:
a. Nominal OD.
b. Minimum bending radius.
c. Maximum pulling tension.
2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling
and asset identification system of the software.
3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:
a. Cross-connects.
b. Patch panels.
c. Patch cords.
5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and
physical relationship between the installed components.
6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and
adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:
a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's
rating for tray and its support elements.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
E738-2
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings Cabling Administration Drawings, and
field testing program development by an RCDD.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise onsite testing.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM
E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strand end to end.
2. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at
each work area.
1.12 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses
for use of software.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation
of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
C. Cable Trays:
1. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by
hot-dip galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than
0.055 mm thick.
E738-3
a.
Basket Cable Trays: 150 mm wide and 50 mm deep. Wire mesh spacing
shall not exceed 50 by 100 mm.
b.
Through Cable Trays: Nominally 150 mm wide.
c.
Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 300 mm wide.
d.
Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 100 mm wide.
Slot spacing shall not exceed 115 mm o.c.
e.
Solid-Bottom Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 305 mm
wide.
D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 50 mm) wide, 75 mm high, and 64 mm deep.
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 19 by 1220 by 2440 mm. Comply with requirements
in Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2.03 UTP CABLE
A. Description: 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue
thermoplastic jacket.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6a.
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as
complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
2.04 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568- B.2, IDC type,
with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting
hardware of same category or higher.
B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6a. Provide blocks for the number of cables
terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs
and jacks where indicated.
C. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at
each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated
cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with
integral IDC-type terminals.
E. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch, 1200-mm lengths; terminated with eightposition modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure
Category 6a performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against
snagging.
2.05 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
A. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 4-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber
cable.
1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.
6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.
B. Jacket:
E738-4
1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.
2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B.
3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed
1000 mm.
2.06 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
A. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 900-mm lengths.
B. Cable Connecting Hardware:
1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of
TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type ST Connectors. Insertion loss not more
than 0.75 dB.
3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.
2.07 COAXIAL CABLE
A. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for
broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm
nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 Db maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.
B. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.
1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.
3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.
4. Suitable for indoor installations.
2.08 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE
A. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
2.09 CONSOLIDATION POINTS
A. Description: Consolidation points shall comply with requirements for cable connecting hardware.
1. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling or Wall.
2. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863.
3. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with UL
2043.
B. Description: MUTOAs shall meet the requirements for cable connecting hardware.
1. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling or Wall.
2. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863.
3. Label shall include maximum length of work area cords, based on TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
4. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with UL
2043.
2.10 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS
A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with
TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B. Workstation Outlets: one or two-port-connector assemblies mounted in multigang faceplate.
2.11 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding
conductors and connectors.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
2.12 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
E738-5
2.13 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database capabilities.
B. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA/EIA details, and connections
between equipment and cable.
C. Information shall be presented in database view.
D. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:
1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer.
2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.
2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
C. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
D. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the
frequency response or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose
frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.
E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications
service provider.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and
counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where
unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes."
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without
exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution
spools.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.
B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division
16 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull
points.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and
wireways.
E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:
1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed,
or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 76 mm above finished floor.
E738-6
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding
system.
G. Backboards: Install backboards with 2440 mm dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and
form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.
5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications
outlet/connectors:
a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection
to workstation equipment.
b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 15 m from communications equipment room.
6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.
Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, crossconnects, and patch panels.
7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm and not
more than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to
smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on
bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter.
Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace
it with new cable.
11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before drilling. Heat lamps shall not be
used for heating.
12. In the communications equipment room, install a 3 m long service loop on each end of cable.
13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, and “Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 12 mm from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating
hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 200 mm above ceilings by cable
supports not more than 1524 mm apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially
damaging items.
F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:
1. Install plenum-rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
3. Coil cable 1800 mm long not less than 300 mm in diameter below each feed point.
G. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:
1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosionresistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.
2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 915 mm.
H. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
E738-7
I. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data
communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded
power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power
lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and
electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm).
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP
and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127
mm).
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Penetration Fire stopping."
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at
least 50 mm clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4
AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment
grounding conductor.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with
requirements for identification.
1. Administration Class: 2.
2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections,
covers, and labels.
B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration
Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for
each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation.
At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.
C. Comply with requirements of "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do
not paint over manufacturer's label.
D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of
administration.
E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming
and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear
plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
E738-8
F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling.
Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and
cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions,
grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.
G. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 100 mm of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or
junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of
wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs:
Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 4.5 m.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring
group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name
and number of particular device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are
used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each
service.
6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These
cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.
H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with
cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA- 606-A.
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect
cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin
assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels.
3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch
cords, and labeling of all components.
4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and
polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after
termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with
a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying
with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test
cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test
configuration.
5. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords
and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction
according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be
less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
6. UTP Performance Tests:
E738-9
a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and
TIA/EIA-568-B.2:
1) Wire map.
2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).
3) Insertion loss.
4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).
7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).
8) Return loss.
9) Propagation delay.
10) Delay skew.
7. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-toend link tests according to TIA/EIA568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
8. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Section "Master Antenna Television System."
9. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete
communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.
a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network
interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number
is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.
b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is
available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto
the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is
formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved
as text files, and printed and submitted.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing
signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of
cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.
---END---
E738-10
SECTION E739
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. EIA/TIA 568 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association) Commercial Building Telecommunication Wiring Standard.
B. EIA/TIA 569 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association)Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
C. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Telecommunications mounting elements.
2. Backboards.
3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.
4. Telecommunications service entrance pathways.
5. Grounding.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated bottom or solidbottom channel not exceeding 152 mm in width.
D. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by
individual transverse members (rungs).
E. LAN: Local area network.
F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
G. Solid-Bottom or Non-ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a bottom without
ventilation openings within integral or separate longitudinal side rails.
H. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate
longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75
percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Floor-mounted cabinets and cable pathways shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from
the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational
after the seismic event."
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks
and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
E739-1
B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable
connections.
3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff
insulators and wall mounting brackets.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces
are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings
is complete.
1.09 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance
arrangement with local exchange carrier.
1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier
representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment
arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels
in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of
telephone switch and LAN equipment.
4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects,
and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security,
and related systems that share space in the equipment room.
B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications
equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation
of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties
to brackets.
1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke producing
characteristics.
2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
4. Straps and other devices.
C. Cable Trays:
E739-2
1. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by hot-dip
galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than 0.05mm thick.
a. Basket Cable Trays: 150 mm wide and 50 mm deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not
exceed 50 by 100 mm.
b. Trough Cable Trays: Nominally 150 mm wide.
c. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 300 mm wide.
d. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 100 mm wide. Slot spacing
shall not exceed 115 mm o.c.
e. Solid-Bottom Cable Trays: One-piece construction, 305 mm wide.
D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 19 by 1220 by 2440 mm. Comply with requirements
for plywood backing panels specified in Section "Rough Carpentry."
2.03 EQUIPMENT FRAMES
A. General Frame Requirements:
1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for
telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be
supported.
2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19-inch panel mounting.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.
B. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, steel or aluminum construction.
1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs,
grounding lug, and a power strip.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
C. Modular Freestanding Cabinets:
1. Removable and lockable side panels.
2. Hinged and lockable front and rear doors.
3. Adjustable feet for leveling.
4. Screened ventilation openings in the roof and rear door.
5. Cable access provisions in the roof and base.
6. Grounding bus bar.
7. 260-L/s fan with filter.
8. Power strip.
9. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
10. All cabinets keyed alike.
D. Modular Wall Cabinets:
1. Wall mounting.
2. Steel or aluminum construction.
3. Treated to resist corrosion.
4. Lockable front and rear doors.
5. Louvered side panels.
6. Cable access provisions top and bottom.
7. Grounding lug.
8. 118-L/s fan.
9. Power strip.
10. All cabinets keyed alike.
E. Cable Management for Equipment Frames:
1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.
2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.
3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers.
E739-3
4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum
height of two rack units each.
2.04 POWER STRIPS
A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.
1. Rack mounting.
2. Six, 16-A, 230-V ac receptacles, cord connected with 4.5m line cord and 13 kA.
3. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
4. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
5. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position.
6. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 13 kA per phase.
7. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449
clamping voltage for all 3 modes shall be not more than 330 V.
2.05 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding
conductors and connectors.
B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:
1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression - type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 6 mm thick by 100 mm wide with 7.14- mm holes spaced
28 mm apart.
3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC,
impulse tested at 5000 V.
C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
2.06 LABELING
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Install underground pathways complying with recommendations in TIA/EIA-569-A, "Entrance
Facilities" Article.
1. Install underground entrance pathway complying with Division 16 Section "Raceways and
Boxes."
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.
C. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.
D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.03 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.04 GROUNDING
E739-4
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"
Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at
least 50-mm clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a
minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical
building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment
grounding conductor.
1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and
spaces.
3.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with
requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For
fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2
level of administration.
D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.
---END---
E739-5
SECTION E740
COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. EIA/TIA 568 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association) Commercial Building Telecommunication Wiring Standard.
B. EIA/TIA 569 (Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industries Association)Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
C. NETA ATS (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pathways.
2. UTP cable.
3. 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling.
4. Coaxial cable.
5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.
6. Cabling identification products.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and
data cabling associated with system panels and devices.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or
cross-connection.
C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
E. LAN: Local area network.
F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.05 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment
rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system
structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects,
mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone crossconnection.
B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at
entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.
1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in
TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
E740-1
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:
a. Nominal OD.
b. Minimum bending radius.
c. Maximum pulling tension.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling
and asset identification system of the software.
2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.
3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:
a. Cross-connects.
b. Patch panels.
c. Patch cords.
4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and
physical relationship between the installed components.
5. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and
adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:
a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for
tray and its support elements.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff as an
RCCD.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise onsite testing.
C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
E. Products: NRTL listed and labeled.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end
2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the
cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of
each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.
3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
E740-2
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.
B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6a cabling, designed to prevent
degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
C. Cable Trays:
1. Cable Tray Material: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by hot-dip
galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than 0.055 mm thick.
a. Basket Cable Trays: 150 mm wide and 50 mm deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed
50 by 100 mm.
b. Trough Cable Trays: Nominally 150 mm wide.
c. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 900 mm wide.
d. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 100 mm wide. Slot spacing shall
not exceed 115 mm o.c.
e. Solid-Bottom Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 305 mm wide.
D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes.
"Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 50 mm wide, 75 mm high and 64 mm deep.
2.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 19 by 1220 by 2440 mm. Comply with requirements
in Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.
2.03 UTP CABLE
A. Description: 100-ohm, 100 pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a gray
thermoplastic jacket.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6a.
a. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying
with UL 444 and NFPA 70.
2.04 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568- B.2, IDC type,
with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting
hardware of same category or higher.
B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6a. Provide blocks for the number of cables
terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs
and jacks where indicated.
E740-3
C. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at
each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair
D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with
integral IDC-type terminals.
E. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables in 1200-mm lengths; terminated with 8- position
modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category
6a performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.
2.05 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
A. Description: Multimode, 50/125-micrometer, 4-fiber, nonconductive tight buffer, optical fiber cable.
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-A for detailed specifications.
2. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:
B. Jacket:
1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.
2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B.
3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed
1000 mm
2.06 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE
A. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 900-mm lengths.
B. Cable Connecting Hardware:
1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of
TIA/EIA-604 2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC or Type ST connectors. Insertion loss not more
than 0.75 dB.
3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.
2.07 COAXIAL CABLE
A. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer
specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall
have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.
B. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.
1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.
2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.
3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid.
4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.
5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85
deg C.
6. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70, "Radio and Television Equipment"
and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles.
2.08 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE
A. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
2.09 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding
conductors and connectors.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
E740-4
2.10 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks,
laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
2.11 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Fiber-Optic cable manufacturers are: AMP Berk-Tek Corning (or approved equivalent).
B. Approved Category 6a 4-pair UTP copper cable manufacturers are: AMP Cat-6a Belden Data
Twist 6a Berk-Tek LANmark-1000 (or approved equivalent).
C. Approved coaxial cable manufacturers are : Belden CommScope (or approved equivalent).
D. The cable manufacturer(s) must be ISO 9001 Registed.
E. Approved Equipment manufacturer is Chatsworth (or approved equivalent).
F. Approved components Manufacturers are : AMP Ortronics Leviton (or approved equivalent).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by
communications service provider.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters except in accessible ceiling spaces and attics. Conceal raceway and cables
except in unfinished spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.
2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section "Raceways and
Boxes."
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where
possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal
points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide
and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A.
B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in
Section E739 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general
arrangement of pathways and fittings.
C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends
between pull points.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of
conduits and wireways.
E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.
F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:
1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is
installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around
perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 76 mm above finished floor.
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to
grounding system.
E740-5
G. Backboards: Install backboards with 2440-mm dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly,
and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations
only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.
5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm
and not more than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and
terminals.
6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending
cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling
Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.
8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during
installation and replace it with new cable.
9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used for heating.
10. In the communications equipment room, install a 3-m long service loop on each end of cable.
11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
B. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 12 mm from the point of termination to maintain cable
geometry.
C. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.
D. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with
terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 12 mm above ceilings by
cable supports not more than 1524 mm apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other
potentially damaging items.
E. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:
1. Install plenum-rated cable only.
2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.
3. Coil cable 1800 mm long not less than 300 mm in diameter below each feed point.
F. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:
1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosionresistant connectors with properly designed Orings to keep out moisture.
2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 915 mm.
G. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
H. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded
copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical
power lines and equipment.
E740-6
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and
unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 127 mm.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 300 mm.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 610 mm.
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded
power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 610 mm.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 150 mm.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 300 mm.
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and
electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 76 mm.
c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 150 mm.
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and
Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 1200 mm.
6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 127 mm.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section "Penetration Fire stopping."
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at
least 50-mm clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4
AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment
grounding conductor.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with
requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Administration Class: 2
2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections,
covers, and labels.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fireresistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of
administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.
D. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and
asset management software.
E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame
and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling.
Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and
cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas
and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding
conductors.
E740-7
G. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within including optional identification requirements of this standard of each
termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as
indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of
wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not
exceeding 4.5 m.
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring
group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of
particular device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are
used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each
service.
H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with
cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling
terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments,
and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch
cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords
and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction
according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be
less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary
report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the
computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
---END---
E740-8